Home

KYOCERA FS-2100D

Contents

1. Key Entry mode Available characters 1 e Alphabetic Symbol 1 LJ Numeric 1 2 ABC Alphabetic Symbol abcABC2 U jJ Numeric 2 3 DEF Alphabetic Symbol defDEF3 Ld Numeric 3 4 GHI Alphabetic Symbol ghi GHI4 a Numeric 4 A 3 Appendix Key Entry mode Available characters D JKL Alphabetic Symbol JKIJKLS o Numeric 5 6 mno Alphabetic Symbol mnoMNO6 Numeric 6 7 pars Alphabetic Symbol pqrsPQRS7 Numeric T Alphabetic Symbol tuvTUV8 8 Tuv p y Numeric 8 O9 wxvz Alphabetic Symbol WXyzWXYZ9 Numeric 9 us Alphabetic Symbol 1 space 0 Numeric 0 XL aA Alphabetic Symbol Switch between upper lowercase Numeric period Characters associated with different keys can be entered consecutively To enter a character associated with the same key after another use cursor keys to move the cursor to the next entry position before entering it If you use cursor keys to move the cursor to an entry position apart from the end of the line and enter a character there spaces are automatically entered in between Entering Symbols Press Text Right Select to display the Symbols screen Use cursor keys to select the symbol you want to enter and then press OK Symbols otn I 4 5 amp t 80 Y LIE f 2 PATAY HEPA Text
2. AA NN T NN 3 Close the duplex front cover 4 Insert the cassette into the slot in the printer The printer warms up and resumes printing 8 21 Troubleshooting Inside the Printer 1 Open the top cover and front cover IMPORTANT Before clearing the jammed paper remove the paper on the MP tray 2 Pull the developer unit together with the toner container 3 Remove the paper from the printer If the jammed paper appears to be pinched by rollers pull it along the normal running direction of the paper Note If you cannot find a paper jam try checking inside the SS rear of the printer Refer to Rear Unit on page 8 23 4 Insert the developer unit together with the toner container back into the machine 5 Close the front cover and top cover The printer warms up and resumes printing 8 22 Troubleshooting Rear Unit 1 If paper is not completely ejected into the top tray open the rear cover 2 Open the fuser cover and remove the jammed paper by pulling it out Note If you cannot find a paper jam try checking inside the rear of the printer M Mp MM MU CAUTION The fuser unit inside the printer is hot Do not touch it with your hands as it may result in burn injury Remove jammed paper carefully 3 Close
3. Item Content Display Icon Description Job Name Job name Job name Job name Result Job status OK OK Completed normally Error A Error occurred Cancel Job canceled Job Type Job type Printer B Printed from a PC Report A Report USB o Printed from USB memory Box aa Printed from Job Box Accepted Time Job reception time Day Month Year Hour Minutet Month Day Year Hour Minutet Year Month Day Hour MinuteT User Name Printed user name User name Printed Pages Pages printed Page s No of pages TM Copies completed Copies specified T The display differs depending on the countries or regions 1 Inthe status menu press A or V to select Job Log 2 Press OK Job Log is displayed along with the job numbers of Job Log lt 0 completed jobs and a list of the job names The job type and result for 0006 BABCDEFGHIJ A each job are also shown as icons Detail 3 Press A or V to select the name of the job whose details you want to view 4 Press Detail Right Select The Detail screen appears HOO Ei Paa No The detailed job log covers 6 pages in all Press gt to view to the next Job Name 1 6 page or lt to return to the previous page ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST Pressing OK returns you to the Job Log menu Detail Status Menu If the entire name shown as the Job Name will not fit on one line Detail 0 p
4. An error has occurred in the USB memory device Look at the error code given in place of The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 01 The amount of data that can be saved at once has been exceeded Split the large file into multiple smaller files The USB memory is write protected Remove the write protection The USB memory is broken Even if the problem is not solved format the USB memory with the device or use the new USB memory compatible with the printer 04 There is no available space Delete unnecessary files etc in order to free up space 8 16 Troubleshooting Clearing Paper Jams If paper jams in the paper transport system or no paper sheets are fed at all the Paper jam message appears and the location of the paper jam the component where the paper jam has occurred is also indicated Status Monitor or Command Center RX can indicate the location of the paper jam the component where the paper jam has occurred Remove the paper jam After removing the paper jam the printer will resume printing IMPORTANT The printer may not feed the paper correctly depending on the paper type Print several pages to confirm whether the printer can feed the paper To feed thick paper smoothly you can select the half speed mode from the printer driver For more information refer to Half Speed Mode Printer Driver Settings on page 3 6 Possible Paper Jam Locations The figure below show
5. A 4 Appendix About the Options This printer has the following options available to satisfy your printing requirements For instructions on installing individual options refer to the documentation included with the option Some options are explained in the following sections Faceup Output Tray PT 320 Expansion Memory SD Memory Card for FS 4100DN FS 4200DN DIMM 256 MB 4 SDHC Memory Card FS 4300DN 512 MB 1 GB Pi i USB Flash Memory Network Interface Kit 1B 50 Wireless Network Parallel Interface Kit Interface Kit IB 51 IB 32 Appendix Expansion Memory Modules The printer s main controller board has a memory slot into which you can plug in optional memory modules dual in line memory modules You can increase the printer s memory up to 1280 MB or 1152 MB on FS 2100D by plugging in the optional memory modules Note A 256 MB or 128 MB on FS 2100D memory module is already installed at the factory To expand memory SJ upto 1280 MB or 1152 MB on FS 2100D install 1024 MB memory module Expansion Memory Modules You can select additional memory modules from 256 512 or 1024 MB Precautions for Handling the Printer s Main Controller Board and Memory Modules To protect electronic parts discharge static electricity from your body by touching a water pipe faucet or other large metal object before handling the memory modules Or wear an antistatic wrist stra
6. e When logged in as an administrator the log in screen is not displayed and the Date Setting menu screen is displayed The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other than an administrator Log in again as an administrator With the Login User Name entry field selected press OK The Login User Name entry screen is displayed Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK The log in screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login User SS Name is Admin For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Press A or V to select the Login Password entry field Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed 4 76 Operation Panel 7 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK A Login User Name The login screen reappears Admin Login Password Login Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login Password is Admin For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 8 Pressing Login Right Select If the entered Login User Name Date Setting lt m and Login Password are correct the Date Setting menu appears Date showing a list of available options Time Date Format Exit Date date setting In the Date Setting menu press A or V to select Date Pi Press OK The Date scr
7. In the Report Print menu press A or V to select SSD File List Press OK A confirmation message is displayed Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set the screen for entering Job Accounting information is displayed Enter the Account ID and press OK Press Yes Left Select The message Accepted appears and the printer prints a list of the files held on the SSD Pressing No Right Select returns to the Report Print menu without printing the SSD file list 4 15 Operation Panel SD Card FileList Printing a list of the files on an SD SDHC memory card This allows you to print a list of the files on an SD SDHC memory card IMPORTANT This message will be displayed only when the SD SDHC memory card is installed in the printer and properly formatted 1 Inthe Report Print menu press A or V to select SD Card FileList 2 Press OK A confirmation message is displayed Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set SJ the screen for entering Job Accounting information is displayed Enter the Account ID and press OK 3 Press ves Left Select Accepted appears and the printer Print prints a list of the files held on the SD SDHC memory card KP bk YON HUE Pressing No Right Select returns to the Report Print menu SD Card FileList without printing the SD SDHC memory card file list Yes J No 4 16 Operation Panel USB Me
8. Some label paper is manufactured with an extra margin of top sheet around the edge Do not remove the extra top sheet from the carrier sheet until after printing is finished Acceptable Unacceptable 4 Top sheet Carrier sheet 3 The table below lists the specifications for adhesive label paper Item Specification Weight of top sheet 44 to 74 g m 12 to 20 Ib ream Composite weight 104 to 151 g m 28 to 40 Ib ream Thickness of top sheet 0 086 to 0 107 mm 3 9 to 4 2 mils Composite thickness 0 115 to 0 145 mm 4 5 to 5 7 mils Moisture content 4 to 6 composite A 19 Appendix Postcards Fan the stack of postcards and align the edges before loading them in the MP tray Make sure the postcards you are going to set are not curled Feeding curled postcards may cause paper jams Envelopes Some postcards have rough edges on the back those are created when the paper is cut In this case put the postcards on a flat place and rub the edges with for example a ruler to smooth them Envelopes should be fed from the MP tray with the print side up or the optional paper feeder PF 320 with the print side down IMPORTANT Do not load paper above the load limits located on the paper width guide of the optional paper feeder For FS 2100D and FS 2100DN set envelope mode Refer to Switching to Envelop Mode FS 2100D FS
9. 2 Press OK The Orientation screen appears Orientation 9 OK o Portrait Landscape 3 Press or V to select the desired Orientation 4 Press OK The orientation is set and the Page Setting menu reappears LF Action Linefeed This procedure instructs the printer what to do when it receives a linefeed code 0AH LF Only Linefeed is performed Default LF and CR A linefeed and carriage return are performed Ignore LF The linefeed is ignored 1 Inthe Page Setting menu press A or V to select LF Action n Press OK The LF Action screen appears LF Action 9 OK LF and CR Ignore LF 3 Press A or V to select the desired action 4 Press OK The action is set and the Page Setting menu reappears CR Action Carriage Return This procedure instructs the printer what to do when it receives a carriage return code ODH CR Only A carriage return is performed Default LF and CR A linefeed and carriage return are performed Ignore CR The carriage return is ignored 1 Inthe Page Setting menu press A or V to select CR Action x Press OK The CR Action screen appears CR Action 9 OK 3 LF and CR Ignore CR 3 Press A or V to select the desired action 4 Press OK The action is set and the Page Setting menu reappears Wide A4 Wide A4 pitch Turn this to On to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for an A
10. 4 104 Operation Panel Parallel I F Parallel interface setting This blocks and protects the parallel interface The default setting is Unblock Parallel I F D 01 4Unblock o Block USB Storage USB memory setting 1 2 Press A or V to select whether to block and protect the optional network interface Press OK The Optional I F setting is set and the 1 F Block Set menu reappears Inthe I F Block Set menu press A or V to select Parallel I E Press OK The Parallel I F screen appears Press A or V to select whether to block and protect the optional parallel interface Press OK The Parallel I F setting is set and the I F Block Set menu reappears This blocks and protects the USB storage USB memory The default setting is Unblock USI B Storage Smid OK 01 4Unblock o Block Security Level 1 2 Inthe I F Block Set menu press A or V to select USB Storage Press OK The USB Storage screen appears Press A or V to select whether to block and protect the USB memory Press OK The USB memory setting is set and the I F Block Set menu reappears The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work There is no need for customers to use this menu 4 105 Operation Panel Data Security Data Security setting This is to change the Security Password initialize on
11. 6 Press OK The sleep level is set and the Sleep Level Set Sleep Level Set m menu reappears o Sleep Level i Sleep Level When Energy Saver is set next go on to set whether or not to use Status Energy Saver mode for each function Exit 4 88 Operation Panel Status Sma OK USB Cable Card Reader Exit Network D Off 7 Press A or V to select Status Note Status is only displayed when Energy Saver is set 8 Press OK The status menu screen appears Next set whether or not to use Energy Saver mode for each function Item Default Value Network Network interface setting On USB Cable USB interface setting On Card Reader ID card reader setting On RAM Disk RAM Disk Mode setting Off Parallel Cable Parallel interface setting On Note Network and RAM Disk are only displayed on network compatible models Card Reader is only displayed when the ID card reader function has been activated Parallel Cable is only displayed when the optional parallel interface kit IB 32 has been installed 9 Press A or V to select which function to set 10 Press OK The screen for the function selected is displayed 11 Press A or V to select whether or not to use Energy Saver mode Select On to set the Energy Saver mode 12 Press OK Set the Energy Saver mode for each function and Status menu reappears
12. Indicator Description Flashing Indicates an error that you can resolve For details refer to Troubleshooting on page 8 1 a Or the printer is in Auto Sleep The printer wakes from Auto Sleep whenever a print job is received The OReady printer then warms up and goes on line For details on Auto Sleep refer to Sleep Timer Sleep timer timeout time on page 4 90 On Indicates that the printer is ready and on line The printer prints the data it receives Off Indicates that the printer is off line because printing is manually stopped or automatically stopped due to an error condition Data can be received but will not be printed For details refer to Error Messages on page 8 5 if printing is automatically stopped when an error condition has occurred E Flashing Indicates that data is being received On Indicates either that data received is being processed before printing starts or that the optional SSD or SD SDHC memory card is being accessed B Data Flashing If Please wait is displayed the printer is warming up Or the printer cannot print for some reason e g there is no paper in the cassette Check the message Attention display and carry out the required action For details refer to Error Messages on page 8 5 On The printer cannot print due to an error Check the message display and carry out the required action For details refer to Error Messages on page 8 5 4 3 Operation Panel Keys Th
13. 1 Inthe copies menu or the Paper Source menu press Function lt 0 Function Right Select The Function menu appears EcoPrint File Name Entry 2 Press A or V to select Duplex 3 Press OK The Duplex screen appears showing the list of available Duplex ping OK duplex printing modes Moff 2 Bind Long Edge Bind Short Edge 4 Press or V to select the desired duplex printing mode The message display toggles through the following Off default Bind Long Edge Bind Short Edge Selecting of f disables duplex printing 5 Press OK The duplex printing mode is set and the Funct ion menu reappears EcoPrint Selecting the EcoPrint mode Set EcoPrint mode For details refer to EcoPrint Selecting the EcoPrint mode on page 4 48 1 Inthe Copies menu or the Paper Source menu press a PN Function lt 0 Function Right Select The Function menu appears Duplex EcoPrint File Name Entry 2 Press A or V to select EcoPrint 4 19 Operation Panel EcoPrint 01 4Off 2 On File Name Entry Entering a file name A Press OK The EcoPrint screen appears Press A or V to select the EcoPrint mode Press OK The EcoPrint mode is set and the Function menu reappears Enter the file name The file name entered is displayed as the Job Name in the Job Status and Job Log Function om Duplex
14. 4 00 999 75 MARE point 5 Press A or V to enter the font size Note The font size can be set between 4 00 and 999 75 points in 0 25 point increments 6 Press OK The font size is set and the Font menu reappears Character Pitch You can set the character pitch for fixed fonts 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Font n Press OK The Font menu screen appears Font Smid OK Font Type Font ID Courier Exit 3 Press A or V to select Pitch 4 Press OK The Pitch entry screen appears Pitch En 0 44 99 99 IUNIO CDi 5 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to enter the character pitch Note The character pitch can be set between 0 44 and 99 99 characters per inch in 0 01 character per inch increments 6 Press OK The character pitch is set and the Font menu reappears Code Set Setting the code set You can change the character code set Available character code sets vary depending on the current font The default is IBM PC 8 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Code Set 4 2 Press OK The Code Set screen appears listing the available Code Set lt m character code sets IBM PC 8 IBM PC 8 D N BM PC 850 4 47 Operation Panel 3 Press A or V to select the desired character code set 4 Press OK The character code set is set and the Print Settings menu reappears Print Quality
15. 4 Press OK The SSL server setting is set and the SSL menu reappears Encryption Encryption setting Select the encryption method used on the SSL server Note This setting is only displayed when the SSL Setting SSL Server setting on page 4 99 is set to On 1 Inthe ssi menu press A or V to select Encryption 2 Press OK The Encryption screen appears Encryption um 0 AES Z DES Oo 3DES Z Complete 3 Press or V to select the encryption method to be used and then press OK The options available in Encryption are as follows AES SSL Server AES setting AES Advanced Encryption Standard was developed to replace DES as the standard encryption as the safety of DES has declined AES is a block encryption system that uses 128 bit blocks and an SPN structure a typical structure for repeated encryption with three selectable key lengths of 128 192 and 256 bits 4 100 Operation Panel DES DES Data Encryption Standard is a typical symmetric key cryptographic algorithm that divides data in to 64 bit blocks and then encrypts each block using a 56 bit key IMPORTANT Symmetric key cryptography because it uses the same key for both encryption and decryption uses the same key in both directions when encrypted data is exchanged Accordingly to prevent the key from being divulged key transfer and storage must be very strictly managed 3DES 3DES Triple Data E
16. 5 Press OK The EcoPrint mode is set and the Function menu reappears 5 19 Document Box File Name Entry entering a file name Enter the file name The file name entered is displayed as the Job Name in the Job Status and Job Log Function pad OK EcoPrint File Name Entry File Name Entry cl doch A ABC Text 1 Inthe Copies menu or the Paper Selection menu press Function Right Select The Function menu appears 2 Press A or V toselect File Name Entry 3 Press OK The File Name Entry screen appears 4 Enter the file name using the numeric keys Note Up to 32 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 for details on Additional Info ml La Job No Date 05 Date Job No entering characters 5 Press OK The Additional Info screen appears 6 Press A or V to select from the additional information that can be set for the file name The following settings can be selected None No additional information is added Date To add the date Job No To add the Job Number Job No Date To add the Job Number and date Date Job No To add the date and Job Number 7 Press OK Register the file name and the Function menu reappears JobFinish Notice Settings for notification when jobs are finished The end of a job is notified using E mail Note To send E mail on
17. Change 2 Press Change Right Select The Del afterPrint screen appears Del afterPrint 0m o Off 02 On 3 Press A or V to select On or Off 4 Press OK The Detail menu screen reappears 5 11 Document Box Editing and Deleting Custom Boxes It is possible to change the detailed settings of the Custom Boxes and to delete Boxes Menu Custom Box 30002 XYZ box 40003 Common Add om 20001 ABC box om S AAAA Z 3 BBBB O Menu Select Editing Custom Boxes Menu Sma OK Search Name Box Detail Edit Delete Detail Sma OK Box Name 1 9 Box03 Edit Deleting Custom Boxes Menu Eua OK Delete Search Name Box Detail Edit 1 Inthe Custom Box list screen press A or V to select the Box to edit or delete 2 Press OK The file list screen for the Box selected is displayed Note If the screen for entering a password is displayed then amp enter the password using the numeric keys and then press OK N 4 Refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 for details on entering characters The following operations are possible Editing Custom Boxes 5 12 Deleting Custom Boxes 5 12 In the file list screen press Menu Left Select The Menu screen appears Press A or V to select Box Detail Edit
18. Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set the screen for entering Job Accounting information is displayed Enter the Account ID and press OK 4 To print 2 or more copies Use the numeric keys or press A or V to Copies om set the number of copies to be printed 1 999 ME copies Function 5 Press OK The Paper Source menu screen appears P S i o 3 Note Function Right Select can be pressed to Letter E Ss change the print settings For details refer to Print Function ijj A4 Plain Settings on page 4 19 A5 Bond Function 6 Press A or V to select the tray containing the paper you want to use 7 Press OK The message Accepted appears and printing begins Accepted 4 18 Operation Panel Print Function Settings When printing the print settings can be changed Options available in Print Function Settings are as follows Duplex Setting the duplex printing 4 19 EcoPrint Selecting the EcoPrint mode 4 19 File Name Entry Entering a file name 4 20 JobFinish Notice Setting for notification when jobs are finished 4 21 Encrypted PDF Entering the PDF password 4 21 TIFF JPEG Size Adjusting the TIFF JPEG file print out size 4 22 XPS FitTo Page Adjusting the XPS file print out size 4 23 Duplex Setting the duplex printing Set duplex printing For details refer to Duplex Setting the duplex printing on page 4 41
19. Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device The above warning is valid only in the United States of America Other precautions for users in California the United States Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Xii Laser Safety Europe Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body For this reason laser radiation emitted inside this machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover In the normal operation of the product by user no radiation can leak from the machine This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC 60825 1 2007 CAUTION Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure This label is attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and is not in a user access area DANGER ATTENTION VORSICHT ATTENZIONE PRECAUCION VARO CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM CLASE 3B RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU KLASSE 3B LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN CLASSE 3B RADIAZIONE LASER IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO CL
20. Paper Feeder PF 320 92 to 216 mm 3 62 to 8 5 inches 13 Press OK The entered paper width is set and the Custom PaperSize menu screen reappears 14 Pressing Exit Right Select returns to the Ready to print screen Media Type Setting the cassette paper type To set the paper type for the paper cassette refer to Media Type Setting the cassette paper type on page 4 29 Bulk Feeder Set Settings for the optional bulk paper feeder To print correctly on paper supplied from the optional bulk paper feeder use the procedure below to set the paper size and media type Note Bulk Feeder Set is displayed only when the optional bulk paper feeder is installed on the printer The options available in Bulk Feeder Set menu are as follows Paper Size Paper size setting for the optional bulk paper feeder 4 33 Media Type Paper type setting for the optional bulk paper feeder 4 34 Paper Size Paper size setting for the optional bulk paper feeder You can use this to set the paper size that can be supplied from the optional bulk paper feeder 1 Inthe Paper Settings menu press A or V to select Bulk Feeder Set 2 Press OK The Bulk Feeder Set menu screen appears Bulk Feeder Set n Paper Size Media Type Exit 3 Press or V to select Paper Size 4 Press OK The Paper Size screen appears listing the paper sizes Paper Size m that can be supplied from the bulk paper feeder
21. T The default value is not displayed and customized Tf If the Power Off Rule is previously set to On the machine turns off the power and all the data stored in the RAM Disk is deleted Note When on is set it automatically turns off Network is only displayed on network compatible models NIC is only displayed when the optional network interface kit IB 50 or wireless network interface kit IB 51 has been installed Parallel I F is only displayed when the optional parallel interface kit IB 32 has been installed USB Cable USB Host Exit Power Off Rule D Network 1 Inthe Timer Setting menu press A or V to select Power Off Rule 2 Press OK The Power Off Rule menu screen appears 4 90 Operation Panel 3 Press A or V to select the condition to be set 4 Press OK The screen for the condition selected is displayed Network paid OK Moff 02 On o Press A or V to select whether or not to have the power switch off 6 Press OK Set to switch the power off and the Power Off Rule menu reappears Note Repeat steps 3 to 6 to set for a different condition Power Off Timer Power off timer settings The time until the power turns off can be set The default setting is 1 hour 1 Inthe Timer Setting menu press A or V to select Power Off Timer 2 Press OK The Power Off Timer screen appears Power Off Timer lt W 2 2 hours
22. 2 Press or V toselect Del after Print 3 Press OK The Del after Print screen appears 4 Press or V to select the Del after Print setting 5 21 Document Box 5 Press OK The Del after Print setting is set and the Function menu reappears Delete a File Delete the file s selected in the Custom Box j 4 1 In the file list screen select the item and press OK The Print 30001 ABC box 3 Delete menu screen appears Print Print ChangeSet Delete N Press or V to select Delete 3 Press OK A confirmation screen appears Delete Are you sure Document 20111 Yes ur No 4 Press Yes Left Select The message Completed appears Completed and the selected file s are deleted Pressing No Right Select returns to the file list menu screen without deleting the file Moving files A file can be moved to a different Custom Box j 4 1 Inthe file list screen select the item and press OK The Print 20001 ABC box lt m Delete menu screen appears Print Print ChangeSet Delete 2 Press A or V to select Move 230001 ABC box D 5 22 Document Box 3 Press OK The Custom Box list screen appears Custom Box Sma OK 40003 Common 0004 doc box A Press or V to select the destination Box 5 Press OK The message Completed appears and the selecte
23. 4 55 Operation Panel oh In the IPv4 Setting menu press A or V to select Auto IP Press OK The Auto IP screen appears Auto IP D oj Off 3 Press or V to select whether Auto IP is enabled 4 Press OK The Auto IP setting is set and the IPv4 Setting menu reappears IP Address IP address setting An IP address is the address of a network device such as a computer and is included in IP packets as needed for the sending and receiving of Internet data IP packets IP addresses can be either destination addresses or source addresses Specifically an IP address is a bit string consisting of a host address or host section that identifies a computer host connected to the Internet and a network address or network section that identifies the network to which that computer belongs or more specifically the computer s network interface Bit strings IP addresses that are unique throughout the entire Internet system are allocated to each computer or interface The IP addresses currently used on the Internet IPv4 have a fixed length of 32 bits Note When you enter the IP address be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off 1 Inthe IPv4 Setting menu press A or V to select IP Address 2 Press OK The IP Address screen appears IP Address tm EEM o o o 3 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the IP address You can set any value between 000 and 255 In
24. Botanichesky pereulok 5 Moscow 129090 Russia Phone 7 495 741 0004 Fax 7 495 741 0018 KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East Dubai Internet City Bldg 17 Office 157 P O Box 500817 Dubai United Arab Emirates Phone 971 04 433 0412 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc 2 28 1 chome Tamatsukuri Chuo ku Osaka 540 8585 Japan Phone 81 6 6764 3555 http www kyoceradocumentsolutions com Rev 2 2012 12 2LVKMEN002
25. Select the screen to be displayed when Document Box is pressed Def Screen Box Document Box default screen setting In the Device Common menu screen press A or V to select Def Screen Box Press OK The Def Screen Box screen appears Press A or V to select either Custom BOX or Job BOX as the default Screen Press OK The default screen is setand the Device Common menu reappears 4 75 Operation Panel Date Setting Date and time settings Set the date and time IMPORTANT To change the Date Setting the administrator s Login User Name and Login Password must be entered For details of the administrator settings refer to Administrator on page 4 116 If you change the date time while using an application you will no longer be able to use the application The date and time settings consist of the following items Date date setting 4 77 Time time setting 4 77 Date Format date format selection 4 77 Time Zone time difference setting 4 78 Summer Time summer time setting 4 78 Login User Name mi ok Login Password Login Login User Name om ABC Text Login User Name A v CO Admin Login Password Login Login Password om Text In the Device Common menu press A or V to select Date Setting Press OK The Login screen appears Note When user login administration is set
26. TCP IP Settings Restart Network Exit 4 Select TCP IP Settings and press OK The TCP IP Settings TCP IP Settings 4 menu screen appears TCP IP IPv4 Setting g IPv6 Settin Exit La TCP IP Enable Disable TCP IP The TCP IP system refers to the Internet system which has a 5 layer structure consisting of the interface layer link layer network IP layer transport TCP UDP layer and application layer The interface layer is a key layer in the TCP IP system that provides an abstracted interface that is not dependent on the link Communication line frame relay or Ethernet etc to the IP module IP layer This means that the IP module can use this abstracted interface which is not dependent on the link type to exchange IP packets back and forth with the link layer 1 Inthe TCP IP Settings menu press A or V to select TCP IP 2 Press OK The TCP IP screen appears TCP IP m 4 54 Operation Panel 3 4 Press A or V to select whether TCP IP is enabled Press OK The TCP IP setting is set and the TCP IP Settings menu reappears IPv4 Setting TCP IP IPv4 settings This selects the settings for TCP IP IPv4 IPv4 Setting pad OK DHCP Auto IP IP Address Exit DHCP DHCP setting 1 2 In the TCP IP Settings menu press A or V to select IPv4 Setting Press OK The 1Pv4 Setting menu screen ap
27. 2 Press OK to enter the password and the Function menu reappears TIFF JPEG Size Adjusting the TIFF JPEG file print out size Use this setting to select the printing method used when TIFF or JPEG files are printed directly Function em Duplex EcoPrint File Name Entry Image Print TIFF JPEG Size lt gt Resolution Resolution 1 A In the Copies menu or the Paper Source menu press Function Right Select The Function menu appears Press or V to select TIFF JPEG Size Press OK The TIFF JPEG Size screen appears The options available in TIFF JPEG Size are as follows Paper Size default Images are resized so that they fill the paper size when printed Image Resolution Image files are printed at the resolution specified in the resolution information Images with no resolution information are printed using the Paper Size setting Print Resolution Images are printed using a 1 to 1 correspondence between the image file pixels and printed dots For example the printed size of a 600 x 300 pixel image file is 1 inch x 1 2 inch Press A or V to select whether TIFF JPEG Size mode is enabled Press OK The TIFF JPEG Size setting is set and the Function menu reappears Note Images are automatically rotated during printing to provide a closer match between the aspect ratios of the image file and the paper used for printing 4 22 Op
28. Print the file s selected in the Custom Box 30001 ABC box m Print ChangeSet Delete Copies 1 Pma OK 999 Heel copies Accepted N Press Select Right Select When there is a file not checked in the Custom Box all files will be checkmarked When all files in the Custom Box are checked all checkmarked files are deselected In the file list screen select the item and press OK The Print Delete menu screen appears Press A or V to select Print Press OK The Copies menu screen appears If you want to change the number of remaining copies to be printed use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the number of copies to be printed Note If Job Accounting is enabled enter the account ID in the login screen that appears The Copies menu screen appears 4 after login is displayed first and it means it according to the set number of copies when the data of each file is preserved In this setting each set number of copies is printed Press OK The message Accepted appears and printing begins When On is selected in the Del afterPrint Setting for file deletion after printing on page 5 11 the selected file will be deleted from the Custom Box after it is printed Document Box Print a File Changes to the print settings To change the print settings for a file selected in a Custom Box and print it j 1 Inthe file list
29. Right Select The message Connecting appears and the connection with the access point starts PIN Device Connect using a PIN code for the wireless network interface kit The connection is started using the PIN code for the machine The PIN code displayed should be entered at the access point The PIN code for the machine is generated automatically Next and press PIN xxxxxxxx tags ge Tl Next Enter the PIN code into the access point 1 2 C In the Quick Setup menu press A or V toselect PIN Device Press OK A PIN code is displayed on the Message display Write down the PIN code displayed on the Message display Press Next Right Select The message Connecting appears At the access point immediately enter the PIN code which wrote down on step 3 The connection with the access point starts PIN Terminal Connect using a PIN code for the access point The connection is started using the PIN code for the access point Enter the PIN code for the access point For details of the PIN code for the access point refer to the Operation Guide of the access point 1 In the Quick Setup menu press A or V to select PIN Terminal 4 65 Operation Panel 2 Press OK The PIN code entry screen appears PIN Code mm i 4 3 Enter the PIN Code using the numeric keys Note Up to 8 characters can be entered For details on
30. SSL Secure Sockets Layer refers to a protocol used to encrypt information sent and received over a network SSL can currently be used to encrypt data such as the WWW or FTP files widely used on the Internet so that privacy related information credit card numbers corporate secrets and other confidential information can be sent and received safely SSL servers use this protocol to authenticate servers and clients The options available in SSL Setting are as follows SSL SSL Server setting 4 99 PP over SSL SSL Server IPP over SSL setting 4 101 HTTPS SSL Server HTTPS setting 4 101 1 Inthe Network Security menu press A or V to select SSL Setting A 2 Press OK The SSL Setting menu screen appears SSL Setting o gt SSL Exit SSL SSL Server setting Select the SSL server settings The options available in SSL are as follows Off On SSL operation setting 4 100 Encryption Encryption setting 4 100 1 Inthe ssL Setting menu press A or V to select SSL 4 99 Operation Panel 2 Press OK The SSL menu screen appears SSL ping Ok Off On Exit Off On SSL operation setting Select whether or not to use the SSL server The default setting is Off 1 Inthe ss1 menu press A or V to select Of On 2 Press OK The Of f 0n screen appears Off On m 01 Of f 02 On 3 Press or V to select whether to use the SSL server
31. The screen for editing the Login User Name appears Change the Login User Name using the numeric keys and press OK The Login User Name screen reappears Note Up to 32 characters can be entered For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Press lt or gt to select Login Password Pressing Edit Right Select The New Password screen appears Enter the new password using the numeric keys and press OK The Confirm Password screen reappears Z Note Up to 64 characters can be entered For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 To confirm re enter the password to be registered Enter the Password using the numeric keys Press OK If the Password matches then the password is changed to the new one and the Login Password screen reappears If the password does not match Incorrect password is displayed and the New Password screen reappears Enter again from the new Password 4 117 Operation Panel To change the E mail Address Detail Mr mailAddress PIE OK 4 5 Edit Address Entry BC om Text To change the Account ID Detail Eua OK Account ID 5 5 Se0THER Change Account ID D 82 341736 ID Card Settings 13 Press lt or gt to select E mailAddress 14 Pressing Edit Right Select The Address
32. User Login Administration is a function which makes it possible to specify the users who can use the machine and to manage the users If the login user name and password entered match those already registered then the user is authenticated and can log in to the machine Users are classified into User Administrator or DeviceAdmin depending on their authority The setting of security levels can only be done by DeviceAdmin The authentication for this machine uses a network authentication server The registration of users is done on the server In the local user list for the machine 1 user with administrator authority and 1 user with device administrator authority are registered To change the administrator information refer to Administrator on page 4 116 When the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated it is possible to log in using an ID card First User Login Administration Follow these steps for the first user login administration Enable user login administration page 4 111 v Add a user on the network server v Log out page 4 114 v The registered user logs in for operations page 4 114 1 Press Menu 2 Press or V to select User Job Account P 3 Press OK The Login screen appears Login User Name LL HE HAUL I Note When user login administration is set Login Password _ e When logged in as an administrator the log in screen is not displayed and the User Job Account menu screen
33. eeeeeeeeeeeeeennenennen nee 4 128 Op Functions Optional application settings c ccc cceseeeeeeeeeeeee sense eee KAN eee eesseeaeeeseeeeeeeeeseeseeeseaneeenes 4 130 5 Document Box Document Bon ER 5 2 Custom BOX PT 5 4 Job BOK aaa a E EIE EE 5 24 Computer settings Printer driven a AN KANG KNA GG E M ERR RE 5 34 6 Status Menu Displaying the Status Menu Screen AA 6 2 dDiEccul 6 2 Job LOG a cessstcececncssdteecncssadieccneada de cctesstctna GRAE GG 6 4 USB Ke ybOald AA 6 5 Wireless NG NOR saa D GG DO Sed sd cae CONSO a cn eg Mee a Sed a aa 6 5 7 Maintenance Toner Container Replacement sireni KA NINA KANA ANAN 7 2 Replacing the Waste Toner Bak AT LAAN AG AGAR 7 6 Cleaningithe Paner ES 7 8 Prolonged Non Use and Moving of the Printer nennen nnne nnn nnne nennen 7 10 8 Troubleshooting General Guidelines 8 2 Print Quality Problems e 8 3 3 ALY 12437 0 AA 8 5 Clearing Paper Jams 8 17 Appendix Character Entry Method AGA ER ERR a ASAN A 2 Abput ile ODLUODS i cioe AA AN AA AA CA EM V IM MU A M I AORN A 5 Expansion Memory Modules nere ANAKAN IND AE AA cage teet esp IR Rt DRE A 6 General Description OF OpLIOFS i xen s toin nG BAGA Fe vanessa ANGELA AA AA AA A 9 Papel aaa GAAN e NANG ORE FAC
34. 3 Minquan E Rd Zhongshan Dist Taipei 104 Taiwan R O C Phone 886 2 2507 6709 Fax 886 2 2507 8432 KYOCERA Document Solutions Korea Co Ltd 18F Kangnam bldg 1321 1 Seocho Dong Seocho Gu Seoul Korea Phone 822 6933 4050 Fax 822 747 0084 KYOCERA Document Solutions India Private Limited First Floor ORCHID CENTRE Sector 53 Golf Course Road Gurgaon 122 002 India Phone 91 0124 4671000 Fax 91 0124 4671001 KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B V Bloemlaan 4 2132 NP Hoofddorp The Netherlands Phone 31 20 654 0000 Fax 31 20 653 1256 KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B V Beechavenue 25 1119 RA Schiphol Rijk The Netherlands Phone 31 20 5877200 Fax 31 20 5877260 KYOCERA Document Solutions U K Limited 8 Beacontree Plaza Gillette Way Reading Berkshire RG2 OBS United Kingdom Phone 44 118 931 1500 Fax 44 118 931 1108 KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S p A Via Verdi 89 91 20063 Cernusco s N MI Italy Phone 39 02 921791 Fax 39 02 92179 600 KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N V Sint Martinusweg 199 201 1930 Zaventem Belgium Phone 32 2 7209270 Fax 32 2 7208748 KYOCERA Document Solutions France S A S Espace Technologique de St Aubin Route de l Orme 91195 Gif sur Yvette CEDEX France Phone 33 1 69852600 Fax 33 1 69853409 KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana S A Edificio Kyocera Avda de Manacor No 2 28290 Las Matas Madrid
35. ABC amp entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Text 4 Press OK The message Connecting appears and the connection with the access point starts Custom Setup Detailed settings for the wireless network It is possible to change the detailed settings of the wireless network 1 Inthe Wireless Network menu press A or V to select Custom Setup n 2 Press OK The Custom Setup menu screen appears Custom Setup Rud OK Netwk Name SSID Connection Mode Channel The following operations are possible Netwk Name SSID Registration of the access point s SSID Connection mode Switch between connection modes Channel Channel settings Netwk Authentic Network Authentication setting Encryption Encryption settings Exit Netwk Name SSID Registration of the access point s SSID This sets the SSID Service Set Identifier for the wireless network access point the machine will be connected to 1 Inthe Custom Setup menu press A or V to select Netwk Name SSID 2 Press OK The Netwk Name SSID entry screen appears Netwk Name SSID Dl Text 3 Enter the access point s SSID using the numeric keys Note Up to 32 characters can be entered For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 4 Press OK The Custom Setup menu reappears Connection mode Switch between connection mod
36. OK The KPDL Error Rpt screen appears KPDL Error Rpt m 2 1 x0ff 02 On 5 Press A or V to select whether error reports are printed 6 Press OK The error report print setting is set and the Emulation menu reappears Alt Emulation Alternative Emulation for KPDL Emulation The KPDL AUTO emulation enables the printer to automatically change the emulation mode according to the data received when printing IMPORTANT This setting only appears when KPDL Auto is selected for the emulation 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Emulation 2 Press OK The Emulation menu screen appears Emulation Dn KPDL Error Rpt Alt Emulation Exit 3 Press A or V to select Alt Emulation j n 4 Press OK The Alt Emulation screen appears showing a list of Alt Emulation 7 the available alternative emulations XD or PCLO The available alternative emulations are as follows BM Proprinter une EPSON LQ 850 IBM Proprinter EPSON LQ 850 Line Printer o Press A or V to select the desired alternative emulation 6 Press OK The alternative emulation is set and the Emulation menu reappears 4 44 Operation Panel Font Selecting the default font You can select the default font The default font can be one of the internal fonts or a font that is downloaded to the printer memory or stored on
37. Operation Panel SecurityPassword Change the Security Password Change the Security Password 1 Inthe SsD Initializ menu press A or V to select Security Passwd 2 Press OK The New Password entry screen appears New Password paid OK E ABC Text 3 Enter the new Security Password using the numeric keys Note The Security Password must be between 6 and 16 characters For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 x 4 Press OK The Confirm Password entry screen appears Confirm Password 0m E ABC Text 5 To confirm re enter the security password to be registered Enter the new Security Password using the numeric keys 6 Press OK If the Security Password entered matches then the password is changed to the new password and the SSD Initializ menu reappears If the password does not match Incorrect password is displayed and the New Password entry screen reappears Enter again from the new Security Password Initialization Initialize on optional SSD Overwrite all the data stored in the optional SSD HD 6 when disposing of the printer IMPORTANT If you accidentally turn the power switch off during initialization the HD 6 might possibly crash or initialization might fail 1 Inthe ssp Initializ menu press A or V to select Initialization 2 Press OK A confirmation message is displayed 3 Press Yes Left Select Th
38. Operation Panel Server Type Server type selection The options available in Netwk Auth Set are as follows Server Type Server type selection 4 112 Host Name Entering of Host Name 4 112 Port Port number setting 4 112 Domain Name Entering of Domain Name 4 113 Select the type of server for the authentication server Server Type Dn NTLM Kerberos Ext Host Name Entering of Host Name 1 2 Enter the host name for the authentication server Host Name D Text Port Port number setting Set the Port number for the authentication server Note This setting is only displayed when SS 112 In the Netwk Auth Set menu press A or V to select Server Type Press OK The Server Type screen appears The available server types are as follows NTLM Kerberos Ext Note Select Ext to perform ID Card Authentication Press A or V to select the desired server type Press OK The server type is set and the Netwk Auth Set menu reappears Inthe Netwk Auth Set menu press A or V to select Host Name Press OK The Host Name screen appears Enter the host name using the numeric keys Note Up to 64 characters can be entered For details on Ss entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 To enter the IPv6 address enclose the address in brackets e g 3ae3 9a0 cd05 b1d2 28a 1fc0 a1 10a
39. Press OK The AvailableNetwork screen appears Note If you cannot find the desired access point press J Reload Right Select to update the information Press A or V to select the access point to connect to Press OK The connection with the access point is started When it is necessary to enter an encryption key the WEP Key entry screen or Preshared Key entry screen appears When a WEP Key must be entered Enter the WEP Key using the numeric keys and press OK Up to 26 characters can be entered For details on entering Z characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 4 64 Operation Panel Preshared Key Text om Push Button Connect using Push Button When a Preshared Key must be entered Enter the Preshared Key using the numeric keys and press OK Note The number of characters is between 8 and 64 For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 When the access point supports the automatic wireless network setup button you can configure the wireless settings automatically using the button and the panel operation of the printer then press Next Press the push button on access point and Next 1 2 In the Quick Setup menu press A or V to select Push Button Press OK A confirmation message is displayed Press the automatic wireless network setup button on the access point Press Next
40. Press OK The Enhanced WSD setting is set and the Network Security menu reappears EnhancedWSD SSL Enhanced WSD SSL setting Set whether to use our proprietary web services over SSL SSL must be set to On in SSL SSL Server setting on page 4 99 The default setting is On EnhancedWSD SSL 0m Off 1 2 In the Network Security menu press A or V to select EnhancedWSD SSL Press OK The EnhancedWSD SSL screen appears Press A or V to select whether Enhanced WSD SSL is enabled Press OK The Enhanced WSD SSL setting is set and the Network Security menu reappears 4 98 Operation Panel IPP IPP setting IPP Internet Printing Protocol is a standard that uses TCP IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be sent between remote computers and printers IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations It also supports the HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption The default setting is Off 1 Inthe Network Security menu press A or V to select IPP i Press OK The IPP screen appears IPP Km OK o Off 02 On 3 Press or V to select whether IPP is enabled 4 Press OK The IPP setting is set and the Network Security menu reappears SSL Setting SSL Server setting
41. Setting print quality In Print Quality menus you can set the KIR mode EcoPrint mode and other settings The options available in Print Quality are as follows KIR Selecting the KIR mode 4 48 EcoPrint Selecting the EcoPrint mode 4 48 Print Resolution Selecting the Print Resolution 4 49 Print Density Selecting the Print Density 4 49 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Print Quality n 2 Press OK The Print Quality menu screen appears Print Quality 9 OK EcoPrint Print Resolution Exit KIR Selecting the KIR mode This printer incorporates the KIR Kyocera Image Refinement smoothing function KIR uses the software to enhance resolution resulting in high quality printing at resolution of 600 dpi and 300 dpi The default is on KIR has no effect on the printing speed 1 Inthe Print Quality menu press A or V to select KIR 2 Press OK The KIR screen appears 3 Press or V to select whether the KIR mode is enabled 4 Press OK The KIR mode is set and the Print Quality menu Screen reappears EcoPrint Selecting the EcoPrint mode By enabling EcoPrint mode you can minimize the amount of toner used during printing Because images printed in this mode may be slightly coarser than those printed in standard resolution you should use EcoPrint for test prints or other situations where high quality prints are not required EcoPrint
42. appears Entry screen 15 Change the address using the numeric keys and press OK The E mailAddress screen reappears Note Up to 128 characters can be entered For details on amp entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Note This item is only displayed when Job Account is set 16 Press lt or to select Account ID 17 Pressing Change Right Select The Account ID screen appears 18 Press A or V to select the Account ID and press OK The Account ID Screen reappears j Note For other accounts select OTHER This sets the login method when the optional Card Authentication Kit is used and users are managed using ID cards Note This item is only displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated For details of the Card amp Authentication Kit refer to Card Authentication Kit B Operation Guide for Printer 4 118 Operation Panel 1 Inthe User Login Set menu press A or V to select ID Card Settings 2 Press OK The ID Card Settings menu screen appears ID Card Settings 0m The options available in ID Card Settings are as follows Password Login Key Login Setting for key login permission 4 119 Password Login Password Login setting 4 119 Exit Key Login Setting for key login permission This setting also permits logging in using the numeric keys on the ID card login screen When Permit is set KeyL
43. is displayed The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other than an administrator Log in again as an administrator Login 4 109 Operation Panel Login User Name Mm ABC Text a A Login User Name Admin Login Password Login Login Password 0m ABC Text Login User Name 7 Admin Login Password Login User Job Account NG User Login Set Job Account Set Exit User Login Set MG User Login Local User List Exit 7 With the Login User Name entry field selected press OK The Login User Name entry screen is displayed Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK The log in screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login User Name is Admin For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Press A or V to select the Login Password entry field Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK The login screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login SV Password is Admin For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Pressing Login Right Select If the entered Login User Name and Login Password are correct the User
44. refer to USB Memory USB memory selection on page 4 17 For information on supported USB memory devices contact your service technician PT 320 Faceup Output Tray for FS 4100DN FS 4200DN FS 4300DN Use the faceup output tray when you wish paper to be stacked with the printed side facing up reverse order To install the faceup output tray perform the following procedures 1 Install the paper stopper according to the size of paper to be used 2 Install the faceup output tray on the rear of the printer A 11 Appendix Other Options PF 315 Bulk Paper Feeder Holds approximately 2 000 sheets of 76 to 216 mm x 148 to 305 mm size paper This bulk paper feeder can be attached to the front of the printer after the MP tray has been removed Data Security Kit E The security kit overwrites data which is no longer necessary to make it difficult to restore it Also when data is stored on the SSD it encrypts the data then writes it It is not possible to decode read anything other than in normal outputs and operations so this provides greater security should it become necessary Card Authentication Kit B It is possible to perform user authentication with an ID card To perform authentication with an ID card it is necessary to first register the ID card information in the list of registered users For the method for registration refer to the Card
45. 1 to 5 Set Settings for the cassettes on page 4 28 Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left and right sides of the cassette Press the paper width adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required Note Paper sizes are marked on the cassette Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required 2 23 Preparation before Use If you are going to use paper that is longer than A4 pull out the paper length guide backwards 7 Load the paper in the cassette Ensure the side to be printed is facing down and the paper is not folded curled or damaged IMPORTANT Do not load paper above the load limits located on the paper width guide Load Limit Before loading the paper be sure that it is not curled or folded Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limit see the illustration on the left Set the stack of paper so that it is under the clips see the illustration on the left The paper length and width guides must be adjusted to the paper size Loading the paper without adjusting these guides may cause skewed feeding and paper jams Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely against the paper If there is a gap readjust the guides to fit the paper 8 Insert the paper cassette into the slot in the machine Push it straight in as far as it will go Note If the machine will not b
46. 10 000 images FS 4200DN and FS 4300DN ZT Note Information Collection on Memory Chips The memory chip attached to the toner container is designed to amp improve convenience for the end user to support the recycling operation of empty toner containers and to gather information to support new product planning and development The information gathered is anonymous it cannot be associated to any specific individual and the data is intended to be used anonymously Toner Kits For best results we recommend that you only use genuine Kyocera Parts and Supplies Should any damage be caused by the application of a toner other than the original toner then this damage is excluded from the guarantee A new toner kit contains the following items Toner Container Plastic waste bags for old toner container and old waste toner box Waste Toner Box Installation Guide Note Do not remove the toner container from the carton until you are ready to install it in the printer 7 2 Maintenance Replacing the Toner Container This section explains how to replace the toner containers When replacing the toner container always replace the waste toner box at the same time If this box is full the printer may be damaged or contaminated by the waste toner that may spill over the box A CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the Toner Container Dangerous sparks may cause burns IMPORTANT During toner container replacement te
47. 16 5 ppm Legal 16 ppm Legal 21 ppm Legal 25 ppm First Print Time A4 feed from 9 seconds or less Cassette Warm up Time Power On 15 seconds or less 20 seconds or 25 seconds or 22 C less less 60 RH T Sleep 15 seconds or less 20 seconds or 25 seconds or less less A 23 Appendix Description Item FS 2100D FS 2100DN FS 4100DN FS 4200DN FS 4300DN Paper Capacity Cassette 500 sheets 80 g m MP Tray 100 sheets 80 g m Output Tray Top Tray 250 sheets 67 g m 500 sheets 67 g m Capacity Face up Tray 250 sheets 67 g m Continuous printing 1 to 999 sheets Resolution Fine 1200 mode Fast 1200 mode 600 dpi 300 dpi Operation Environment Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F Relative Humidity 15 to 80 Altitude 2 500 m 8 202 feet maximum Illumination 1 500 lux maximum Controller PowerPC465 PowerPC465 ARM9 Operating Systems Windows XP Windows Server 2003 R2 Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 Apple Macintosh OS 10 4 or later Interface Standard USB Interface USB Interface Connector 1 Connector 1 USB Host 2 USB Host 2 Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX 1000 BASE T eKUIO slot1 eKUIO slot 1 Option HD 6 IB 50 IB 51 IB 32 PDL PRESCRIBE Emulation PCL6 IBM Proprinter EPSON LQ 850 Line Pr
48. 2 ABC 19 2 The altitude is 1500 m or higher and Change the Altitude Adj settingin Service Setting menu to there are some dropouts or stray dots High 1 If there is still no improvement change the setting to High in the printouts 2 For more information refer to Service Setting for Maintenance on page 4 128 ABC ABC 123 123 Troubleshooting Error Messages The following table lists errors and maintenance messages that you can be dealt with by yourself If Machine failure Call service appears turn off the printer disconnect the power cord and contact your service technician If Machine failure Call service OrError occurred Turn the main power switch off and on is displayed turn off the printer then turn it back on to see if the printer has recovered If the printer has not recovered turn off the printer disconnect the power cord and contact your service representative or authorized service center Some errors cause the alarm to sound To stop the alarm press Cancel Message Corrective Action A machine administrator right is required You can only change the settings selected when logged in as a user with machine administrator privileges Access denied You cannot login The Log in operation failed for the specified number of times so it is no longer possible to attempt to log in Contact a system administrator Access point
49. 2 In the IPv6 Setting menu press A or V to select RA Stateless Press OK The RA Stateless screen appears Press A or V to select whether RA Stateless is enabled Press OK The RA Stateless setting is set and the IPv6 Setting menu reappears DHCPv6 is the next generation of the Internet s Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6 It extends the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the network DHCPv6 permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an IPv6 node Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically the IPv6 node management workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation DHCPv6 D Ore 1 2 o In the IPv6 Setting menu press A or V to select DHCPv6 Press OK The DHCPv6 screen appears Press A or V to select whether DHCPv6 is enabled Press OK The DHCPV6 setting is set and the IPv6 Setting menu reappears 4 59 Operation Panel Protocol Detail Detailed settings for the network protocol This selects the settings for Protocol Detail Item Description Default Setting Restarting the System NetBEUI Selects whether or not to receive On x documents using NetBEUI SNMPv3 Set SNMPv3 Off e FTP Server Select whe
50. 340 mm 16K ISO B5 Envelope DL Oufuku Hagaki Envelope C5 and Custom IMPORTANT You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating Such papers may cause paper jams or other faults When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled or colored paper always specify the media type setting Refer to Cassette 1 to 5 Set Settings for the cassettes on page 4 28 The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 120 g m Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 120 g m in the cassettes Use the multi purpose tray for paper that is heavier than 120 g m Note A6 can only be used in cassette 1 1 Fan the media paper transparencies then tap it on a level surface to avoid media jams or skewed printing 2 Pullthe cassette completely out of the machine Cassette y l IMPORTANT When pulling the cassette out of the machine i ensure it is supported and does not fall out 3 On FS 2100D FS 2100DN only Press the bottom plate down until it locks d Bottom Plate Y 5 S ZS 2 Po NG 2 22 Preparation before Use Paper Width Guides stwtl AS Bsl aal Paper Width Adjusting Tab Paper Length Adjusting Tab Turn the Paper Size Dial so that the size of the paper you are going to use appears in the Paper Size Window Note When the Paper Size Dial is set to Other the paper size must be set into the printer on the operation panel Refer to Cassette
51. 4 111 and NTLM or Kerberos has been set as the Server Type Server type selection on page 4 112 1 IntheUser Login Set menu press A or V to select NW User Property T 2 Press OK The NW User Property menu screen appears NW User Property MG Off On The options available in NW User Property are as follows AgbBentddat Type n Switching network user property acquisition On Off 4 Authenticat Type Authenticat type setting 4 114 Exit Note Authenticat Type is only displayed when SV Kerberos has been set as the Server Type Server type selection on page 4 112 Off On Switching network user property acquisition On Off Set the NW User Property to On Off 1 Inthe nw User Property menu press A or V to select O On 4 113 Operation Panel 2 Press OK The Of f 0n screen appears Off On D OFF 3 Press A or V to select On or Off 4 Press OK The NW User Property menu reappears Authenticat Type Authenticat type setting Set the authentication method 1 Inthe NW User Property menu press A or V to select Authenticat Type n 2 Press OK The Authenticat Type screen appears Authenticat Type 0m 01 4s5imple 02 SASL 3 Press A or V to select Simple or SASL 4 Press OK The NW User Property menu reappears Login Logout Once you enable user login administration a login user name and password entry screen appear
52. A or V to select MP Tray Priority Press OK The MP Tray Priority screen appears showing the available MP tray priority mode options Off The printer driver settings are followed Auto Feed If Auto is selected in the printer driver and there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray Always If there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray regardless of what is set in the printer driver Press A or V to select the desired MP tray priority mode Press OK The MP tray priority mode is set and the Print Settings menu reappears Paper Feed Mode Setting the paper feed source This mode specifies how the paper should be fed once the paper feed source and paper type have been chosen If Auto is selected the printer searches for a paper feed source that matches the paper size and type and paper is then delivered from that source If Fixed is selected and there is no matching paper feed source handling proceeds as specified by Paper MismatchforError Handling For details on paper feeding when Fi xedis selected refer to Paper Mismatch Detection settings for paper size type errors when the paper source is fixed on page 4 85 The default setting is Auto To change the settings follow the steps described below Paper Feed Mode lt 0 Fixed 1 2 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V toselect Paper Feed Mode Press OK The Paper Feed Mode screen appea
53. Action SD card error Press OK tit An SD SDHC Memory Card error has occurred Look at the error code given in place of The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 02 The printer does not support the SD SDHC memory card inserted or the SD SDHC memory card is broken Install the correct SD SDHC memory card 03 The SD SDHC memory card is write protected using command operation Remove the write protection using the command 04 There is not enough space in the SD SDHC memory card Delete unnecessary files or use a new SD SDHC memory card 05 The desired file does not exist in the SD SDHC memory card Stored the file in the SD SDHC memory card 10 The file stored in the SD SDHC memory card is write protected using command operation Remove the write protection using the command SSD error Press OK tit An SSD error has occurred Look at the error code given in place of The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 03 The SSD is write protected using command operation Remove the write protection using the command 04 There is no available SSD space Delete unnecessary files etc in order to free up space 05 The desired file does not exist in the SSD Stored the file in the SSD 10 The file stored in the SSD is write protected using command operation Remove the write protection using the command The fil already exist
54. Are you sure 21228 Yes No 6 To proceed with deleting the account press Yes Left Select nanana List Vum Completed appears and the account is deleted The once deleting 2200122 of the account ends the Account List screen reappears 3485739 Pressing No Right Select returns to the list of selections options without deleting the account Add Apply Limit Operation settings when limits are exceeded Use this to specify the action taken when a department exceeds its printing limits 1 Inthe Job Account Set menu press A or V to select Apply Limit N 2 Press OK The Apply Limit screen appears Apply Limit pai OK immediately 624 Subsequent 1 e Subsequently prohibit printing from the next job onwards Immediately prohibit printing from this job onwards 4 126 Operation Panel Job Account Set Bl Account List Unknown ID Job Exit 3 Press A or V to select a setting and then press OK The Job Account Set menu list reappears Unknown ID Job Operation settings for unknown account IDs Use this procedure to specify whether print jobs from departments with unknown account IDs are permitted Unknown ID Job D 0o Reject 02 Permit Job Account Set Account List Apply Limit Exit 1 2 In the Job Account Set menu press A or V to select Unknown ID Job Press OK T
55. Authentication Kit B Operation Guide USB Keyboard A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel A special mount is also available to install the keyboard on the printer Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on keyboards that are compatible with your printer before you purchase one ThinPrint Option This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver Appendix Paper General Guidelines The machine is designed to print on standard copier paper the type used in ordinary dry copier machines but it can also accept a variety of other types of paper within the limits specified below Note The manufacturer assumes no liability for problems that occur when paper not satisfying these requirements is used Selection of the right paper is important Using the wrong paper can result in paper jams curling poor print quality and paper waste and in extreme cases can damage the machine The guidelines given below will increase the productivity of your office by ensuring efficient trouble free printing and reducing wear and tear on the machine Paper Availability Most types of paper are compatible with a variety of machines Paper intended for xerographic copiers can also be used with the machine There are three general grades of paper economy standard and premium The most significant difference between grades is the ease
56. Box amp User01 U Print Delete od 1 Inthe Job Box menu press A or V to select Private Stored Press OK The Private Stored screen appears listing the user names for stored jobs Press A or V to select the user name you entered in the printer driver Press OK The printer displays a list of the jobs stored under the selected user name Press A or V to select the name of the job to be printed When Select Right Select is pressed the file is selected A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file Select the checkmarked file and press Select Right Select again to cancel the selection Note To select all files follow the steps of Select Deselect All amp Files on page 5 26 In the file list screen select the item and press OK The Print Delete menu screen appears 5 29 Document Box D 0 00014 Copies Dn 1 999 Emel copies Accepted Deleting a Private Stored Job 2 Press A or V toselect Print and press OK If the selected job was saved as a Private Print job its ID is displayed If the job was saved in stored job mode the number of direct copies is displayed Use the numeric keys to enter the access code entered in the printer driver Press OK If the entered access code is correct the Copies menu screen appears If the entered access code is incorrect the ID menu screen reappears No
57. Color Prepunched High Quality and CUSTOM 1 to 8 MP Tray Plain Transparency Preprinted Labels Bond Recycled Vellum Rough Letterhead Color Prepunched Envelope Cardstock Thick High Quality and CUSTOM 1 to 8 Paper Sizes Cassette Envelope C5 Executive 8 1 2 x 11 Letter 8 1 2 x 14 Legal A4 B5 A5 ISO B5 Oficio Il 216 x 340 mm 16K Statement Folio and Custom Envelope DL Envelope C5 Executive 8 1 2 x 11 Letter 8 1 2 x 14 Legal A4 B5 A5 A6 B6 ISO B5 Oufuku Hagaki Oficio II 216 x 340 mm 16K Statement Folio and Custom MP Tray Envelope Monarch Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Executive 8 1 2 x 11 Letter 8 1 2 x 14 Legal A4 B5 A5 A6 B6 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 ISO B5 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Oficio Il 216 x 340 mm 16K Statement Folio Youkei 2 Youkei 4 and Custom Magnification ratio 20 to 50096 196 increments Printing Simplex A4 40 ppm A4 45 ppm A4 50 ppm A4 60 ppm Speeds B5 33 ppm B5 36 ppm B5 40 ppm B5 48 ppm A5 22 ppm A5 23 ppm A5 27 ppm A5 32 ppm A6 22 ppm A6 23 ppm A6 27 ppm A6 32 ppm Letter 42 ppm Letter 47 ppm Letter 52 ppm Letter 62 ppm Legal 33 ppm Legal 38 ppm Legal 42 ppm Legal 50 ppm Duplex A4 20 ppm A4 32 ppm A4 36 ppm A4 43 ppm B5 16 5 ppm B5 25 ppm B5 28 ppm B5 34 ppm A5 11 ppm A5 16 ppm A5 19 ppm A5 23 ppm Letter 21 ppm Letter 33 ppm Letter 37 ppm Letter 44 ppm Legal
58. DuplexPaperError Duplex printing error detection setting If the error detection setting for duplex printing has been turned Display Error and you attempt to print onto a paper size and paper type that cannot be used for duplex printing the Duplex disabled error message will be displayed and printing will stop Display To print onto one side of the paper only when this message is displayed press OK Error Press Cancel to cancel the printing itself 1 sided To print onto one side of the paper 1 Inthe Error Handling menu press A or V to select DuplexPaperError 2 Press OK The DuplexPaperError screen appears a A DuplexPaperError pai OK Display Error 3 Press A or V to select the setting for handling duplex paper errors 4 Press OK The handling of duplex paper errors is set and the Error Handling menu screen reappears Paper Mismatch Detection settings for paper size type errors when the paper source is fixed Select Continue in this setting if you want to continue printing even if the paper size or type you specified is different from the fixed paper source or select Display Error to have the paper feed error displayed 1 Inthe Error Handling menu press A or V to select Paper Mismatch NG 2 Press OK The Paper Mismatch screen appears Paper Mismatch 9 OK 0o Continue Display Error 3 Press or V to select
59. EET 3 6 4 Operation Panel Message Display e 4 2 KEYS 4 4 Using the Menu Selection System ccsiisccccccccsssecccccccsscceccseesscceecevsasceecevecnscceecvecnseteceseesseceeeesenssctecvecsscieseeenazecerds 4 7 Setting a Mode Selection Menu sncccssivsccccccisscceccsiceccecceseseeeccccssesececcsdceconcceseseeececcsteneacecssteconecessecoeceaseeseecesstesooee 4 9 Report c Ma 4 10 USB Memory USB memory selection eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen nennen nenne nnna 4 17 Counter Viewing the counter value eese eene nn nennen nn nnn inneren tern nena internen nan nennen 4 25 E E 4 26 Print SQUtinQS 4 39 Network Network settings iii enean neuen AIN GS EARN 4 54 Optional Network Optional Network settings eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeenennnenen nennen enne nennen nnne 4 62 Device Common Selecting Setting the common device eeeeeeeeeeenneeeen nnnm 4 74 Security Security function setting 1 1cceeoeuiacen hacen tnam iaa ene a Epda sene Spa do sunm Rao nS me EE pian uc 4 96 User Job Account User Login Setting Job Account setting eene 4 109 Adjust Maint Adjust Maintenance selection setting
60. EcoPrint File Name Entry File Name Entry 0m dock A ABC Text Additional Info 0 04 Job No Date 05 Date Job No 1 N In the Copies menu or the Paper Source menu press Function Right Select The Function menu appears Press A or V to select File Name Entry Press OK The File Name Entry screen appears Enter the file name using the numeric keys Note Up to 32 characters can be entered For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Press OK The Additional Info screen appears Press A or V to select from the additional information that can be set for the file name The following settings can be selected None No additional information is added Date To add the date Job No To add the Job Number Job No Date To add the Job Number and date Date Job No To add the date and Job Number Press OK Register the file name and the Function menu reappears 4 20 Operation Panel JobFinish Notice Setting for notification when jobs are finished Notification that a job has finished is sent by E Mail Note To send E mail from this machine set the SMTP and POP3 settings to On For details refer to the Protocol amp Detail Detailed settings for the network protocol on page 4 60 Itis necessary to register a mail server For the method for setting the serve
61. Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK Login User Name The login screen reappears Admin Login Password Login Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login SV Password is Admin For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 8 Pressing Login Right Select If the entered Login User Name Timer Setting lt m and Login Password are correct the Timer Setting menu appears showing a list of available options PanelReset Timer Sleep Level Set Exit Auto Panel Reset Auto panel reset setting The Auto Panel Reset function automatically restores the default settings if the panel is not used for a set time The default setting is On For setting the time until the panel is automatically reset refer to PanelReset Timer Setting the panel reset timer on page 4 88 1 Inthe Timer Setting menu press A or V to select Auto Panel Reset 2 Press OK The Auto Panel Reset screen appears Auto Panel Reset 0m 3 Press or V to select whether Auto Panel Reset is enabled 4 Press OK The Auto Panel Reset setting is set and the Timer Setting menu reappears Operation Panel PanelReset Timer Setting the panel reset timer When Auto Panel Reset is set to On this sets the time until the panel is automatically reset after the user stops using the panel The default setting is 90 seconds
62. Envelope C5 Executive Envelope Monarch od Letter Envelope 10 Envelope DL The available paper sizes are as follows Envelope C5 Executive Letter A4 B5 4 33 Operation Panel 5 6 A5 A6 B6 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 ISO B5 Custom Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki 16K Statement Youkei 2 Youkei 4 Press A or V to select the desired paper size Press OK The paper size for the bulk paper feeder is set and the Bulk Feeder Set menu screen reappears Media Type Paper type setting for the optional bulk paper feeder You can use this to set the paper type that can be supplied from the optional bulk paper feeder Paper Size Media Type Exit Bulk Feeder Set NG Media Type tm o Plain 2 Transparency Preprinted 1 2 5 In the Paper Settings menu press A or V to select Bulk Feeder Set Press OK The Bulk Feeder Set menu screen appears Press A or V to select Media Type Press OK The Media Type screen appears listing the media types that can be supplied from the bulk paper feeder The available media types are as follows Plain Transparency Preprinted Labels Bond Recycled Vellum Rough Letterhead Color Prepunched Envelope Cardstock Thick High Quality CUSTOM 1 to 8 4 34 Operation Panel 5 Press A or V to select the desired media type 6 Press OK The media type for the bulk paper feeder
63. Fogging is a gray background effect Basis Weight Basis weight is the weight of paper expressed in grams per square meter g m Paper that is too heavy or too light may cause feed errors or paper jams as well as premature wear of the product Uneven weight of paper namely uneven paper thickness may cause multiple sheet feeding or print quality problems such as blurring because of poor toner fusing The recommended basis weight is between 60 and 120 g m 16 and 32 Ib ream for the cassette and between 60 and 220 g m 16 and 59 Ib ream for the MP tray Paper Weight Equivalence Table The paper weight is listed in pounds Ib and metric grams per square meter g m The shaded part indicates the standard weight U S Bond Weight Ib Europe Metric Weight g m U S Bond Weight Ib Europe Metric Weight g m 16 60 32 120 17 64 34 128 20 75 36 135 21 80 39 148 22 81 42 157 24 90 43 163 27 100 47 176 28 105 53 199 Appendix Thickness The paper used with the machine should be neither extremely thick nor extremely thin If you are having problems with paper jams multiple feeds and faint printing the paper you are using may be too thin If you are having problems with paper jams and blurred printing the paper may be too thick The correct thickness is 0 086 to 0 110 mm 3 4 to 4 3 mils Moisture Content Moisture content is defined as the percent ratio of moisture to the dry mass of
64. In the Paper Settings menu press A or V to select MP Tray Set Press OK The MP Tray Set menu screen appears Press A or V to select Media Type 4 27 Operation Panel 4 Press OK The Media Type screen appears listing the media types Media Type pai OK that can be supplied from the MP tray Plain The available media types are as follows Transparency Preprinted Plain Transparency Preprinted Labels Bond Recycled Vellum Rough Letterhead Color Prepunched Envelope Cardstock Thick High Quality CUSTOM 1 to 8 5 Press A or V to select the desired media type 6 Press OK The media type for the MP tray is set and the MP Tray Set menu screen reappears Cassette 1 to 5 Set Settings for the cassettes To print correctly on paper supplied from the cassettes use the procedure below to set the paper size and media type Set the cassette according to the paper size Setting the standard paper size 4 28 Setting the non standard paper size 4 30 The options available in Cassette 1 to 5 Set menu are as follows Media Type Setting the cassette paper type 4 29 Other Paper Size Setting the Paper Size from the Operation Panel 4 30 Custom PaperSize Setting a Custom Paper Size 4 31 Setting the standard paper size To set the standard sizes A5 A4 B5 Letter Legal and A6 paper cassette the following operations are necessary Setting the cassette paper
65. Inthe Paper Settings menu press A or V to select the cassette you want to set 2 Press OK The Cassette 4 Set menu screen appears shows the number of the cassette installed in the printer 1 to 5 3 Press or V to select Media Type 4 Press OK The Media Type screen appears listing the media types that can be used with the selected cassette The available Media Types are as follows Plain Prepr Bond Recycl Rough Lette Color Prepu inted ed rhead nched Envelope 11 High Quality CUSTOM 1 to 8 1 Only when optional paper feeder PF 320 is installed 5 Press or V to select the desired media type 6 Press OK The media type for the cassette is set and the Cassette Set menu screen reappears 4 29 Operation Panel Setting the non standard paper size To set the non standard sizes sizes other than A5 A4 B5 Letter Legal and A6 paper cassette the following operations are necessary Selecting the Size Dial Setting 4 30 Other Paper Size Setting the Paper Size from the Operation Panel 4 30 Custom PaperSize Setting a Custom Paper Size 4 31 Media Type Setting the cassette paper type 4 33 Selecting the Size Dial Setting 1 Pullthe cassette out of the printer and set the paper size dial to Other For details refer to step 1 in Setting the cassette paper size on page 4 28 2 Adjust the paper guides in the cassette to the size of the paper to be u
66. Job Account menu Screen appears 10 Press A or V to select User Login Set 11 Press OK The User Login Set menu appears 4 110 Operation Panel User Login This enables user login administration This switches the User Login Administration On Off and sets the authentication network server 1 Inthe User Login Set menu press A or V to select User Login x 2 Press OK The User Login menu screen appears User Login 9 OK Login Type Exit Login Type Enabling of User Login Administration Select Netwk Authentic to enable User Login Administration 1 Inthe User Login menu press A or V to select Login Type n 2 Press OK The Login Type screen appears User Login Smid OK Login Type T 3 Press A or V to select Netwk Authentic or Off Login Type pag Ok o1 Off 02 Netwk Authentic 4 Press OK The User Login menu reappears Note When Netwk Authentic is selected set the network authentication server Netwk Auth Set Netwk authentication setting Set the network authentication server Note These settings are only displayed when Netwk Authentic has been set as the Login Type Enabling of amp User Login Administration on page 4 111 1 Inthe User Login menu press A or V to select Netwk Auth Set 2 Press OK The Netwk Auth Set menu screen appears Netwk Auth Set 0m Host Name Domain Name Exit 4 111
67. Job Box menu screen appears The options available in Job Box are as follows Quick Copy Using Quick Copy Proof and Hold 5 25 Private Stored Printing a Private Print Stored Job 5 28 Job Box Setting Job Box Configuration 5 32 Quick Copy is displayed if there are any jobs that were saved to the SSD or SD SDHC memory card in Quick Copy mode Quick Copy is also displayed if there are any jobs that were saved to SSD SD SDHC memory card or RAM disk in Proof and Hold mode Private Stored is only displayed if there are any jobs that were saved to the SSD SD SDHC memory card or RAM disk Quick Copy Using Quick Copy Proof and Hold Quick Copy mode enables you to print the requested number of copies of a job simultaneously storing the job on the SSD or SD SDHC memory card When additional copies are required you can reprint the required number of copies from the printer operation panel The default number of print jobs that can be stored on the SSD or SD SDHC memory card is 32 This value can be increased to up to 300 For details refer to Job Box Setting Job Box Configuration on page 5 32 When the number of jobs reaches the limit the oldest job will be overwritten by the new one When you print multiple copies Proof and Hold mode first prints one copy so that you can proof it before continuing to print the remaining copies Since you can proof the printouts before printing the remaining copies wastage of paper ca
68. MOSPU esis naks AA LAAN 4 9 Report PING e M NAAANINAG 4 10 USB Memory USB memory selection sccsiniccsesiscicciarencascanecnnncaensccenastanseinsnanccttescntuesarionecinsnanmssexnansane 4 17 Counter Viewing the counter valug siscinisaicsicsicncsscansonnciascanotsennacsensncinnasesnacesnnesantondaiannensateanaesasianness 4 25 Paper Settings aio rec AANI HE pal cu Ni ANAKAN M bM M QUE MK C E 4 26 Lui eco I me T 4 39 Network Network Settings PT 4 54 Optional Network Optional Network settings cessent nnn 4 62 Device Common Selecting Setting the common device eese 4 74 Security Security function setting NG AKA NGAGE GANAN 4 96 User Job Account User Login Setting Job Account setting eeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeees 4 109 Adjust Maint Adjust Maintenance Selection Setting ccccccsseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeseeneeseeeeeees 4 128 Op Functions Optional application settings cccccesssssseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeaeeseeeeneeeeaaes 4 130 4 1 Operation Panel Message Display Messages indicating the status of the various printer operations are displayed on the message display Status Information Message Meaning Please wait The printer is warming up and is not ready When the printer is switched on for the first time this message will take se
69. Press OK The Detail screen appears Press lt or gt to check each of the settings and make changes Note For the method for making changes refer to Detailed box SX settings on page 5 6 5 When the editing is completed press OK The file list screen reappears In the file list screen press Menu Left Select The Menu screen appears Press A or V to select Delete Document Box Delete Are you sure BRABC box Yes No Custom Box U 40003 Common 40004 DEF box Menu ps af Add Sorting the Custom Box list 3 Press OK A confirmation screen appears 4 To proceed with deleting the custom box press Yes Left Select Completed appears and the custom box is deleted The once deleting of the custom box ends the Custom Box list screen reappears Pressing No Right Select returns to the file list screen without deleting the custom box When user login administration is enabled it is possible to sort the list display into either Box Number order or Box Owner order Menu Ema OK Search No File Del Time A Sort Smid OK EON 0 Box No Box Owner 1 N A In the Custom Box list screen press Menu Left Select The Menu screen appears Press or V to select Sort Press OK The Sort screen appears Press A or V to select Box No or Box Owner Press OK The Menu scree
70. Press A or V to select Counter Press OK The total number of pages to print and the number of pages per paper size are displayed Press A or V to view the number of pages printed in other paper sizes 4 25 Operation Panel Paper Settings This sets the paper size and type for the MP tray and cassettes from which paper is supplied The options available in Paper Settings are as follows MP Tray Set MP tray settings 4 26 Cassette 1 to 5 Set Settings for the cassettes 4 28 Bulk Feeder Set Settings for the optional bulk paper feeder 4 33 Media Type Set Paper type settings 4 35 Reset Type Adj Resets customized settings 4 38 1 Press MENU 2 Press or V to select Paper Settings 3 Press OK The Paper Settings menu appears showing a list of Paper Settings lt m available options Cassette 1 Set Media Type Set Exit MP Tray Set MP tray settings To print correctly on paper supplied from the MP tray use the procedure below to set the paper size and media type Note Feeding the paper having a paper size which does not match the current paper size from the MP tray can cause paper jam The options available in MP Tray Set menu are as follows Paper Size Paper size setting for the MP tray 4 26 Media Type Paper type setting for the MP tray 4 27 Paper Size Paper size setting for the MP tray You can use this to set the paper size that can be
71. Set the backlight for the message display 1 Inthe Device Common menu press A or V to select Disp Backlight 2 Press OK The Disp Backlight screen appears Disp Backlight m DP fol on The list shows the following display backlight settings 03 off On Standard Touched Off No backlight Touched Backlight lights up when the key on the operation panel is pressed Note If Touched is selected the backlight turns off again SS when the panel is reset after the setting time of Auto Panel Reset has passed or when Logout is pressed 3 Press or V to select the desired backlight setting 4 Press OK The backlight setting is set and the Device Common menu reappears Error Handling Error detection setting This specifies the settings for the detection methods used for duplex printing errors and for paper size and paper type errors when the paper source is fixed The options available in Error Handling are as follows DuplexPaperError Duplex printing error detection setting 4 85 Paper Mismatch Detection settings for paper size type errors when the paper source is fixed 4 85 MP Tray Empty Warning when the MP tray is empty 4 85 1 Inthe Device Common menu press A or V to select Error Handling 2 Press OK The Error Handling menu screen appears Error Handling Dn Paper Mismatch MP Tray Empty Exit 4 84 Operation Panel
72. Spain Phone 34 91 6318392 Fax 34 91 6318219 KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy Atomitie 5C 00370 Helsinki Finland Phone 358 9 47805200 Fax 358 9 47805390 KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B V Amsterdam NL Z rich Branch Hohlstrasse 614 8048 Z rich Switzerland Phone 41 44 9084949 Fax 41 44 9084950 2012 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc OX KYOCERA is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation KYOCERA Document Solutions Deutschland GmbH Otto Hahn Strasse 12 40670 Meerbusch Germany Phone 49 2159 9180 Fax 49 2159 918100 KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH Eduard Kittenberger Gasse 95 1230 Vienna Austria Phone 43 1 863380 Fax 43 1 86338 400 KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista Sweden Phone 46 8 546 550 00 Fax 46 8 546 550 10 KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf Postboks 150 Oppsal 0619 Oslo Norway Phone 47 22 62 73 00 Fax 47 22 62 72 00 KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A S Ejby Industrivej 60 DK 2600 Glostrup Denmark Phone 45 70223880 Fax 45 45765850 KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda Rua do Centro Cultural 41 Alvalade 1700 106 Lisboa Portugal Phone 351 21 843 6780 Fax 351 21 849 3312 KYOCERA Document Solutions South Africa Pty Ltd 49 Kyalami Boulevard Kyalami Business Park 1685 Midrand South Africa Phone 27 11 540 2600 Fax 27 11 466 3050 KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC
73. The Status menu screen appears The following operations are possible on the Status menu screen Note USB Keyboardis only displayed when a USB keyboard is N connected Wireless Network is only displayed when the optional wireless network interface kit IB 51 is installed It is possible to check the status of jobs printing or awaiting printing In addition to the jobs printed from computers it is also possible to check reports such as status pages and jobs printed directly from USB memory The information available in the Job Status is listed below Results Displayed Item Content Display Icon Description Job Name Job name Job name Job name Status Job status Processing E Printing Pause I Printing suspended Canceling Q Job canceled Job Type Job type Printer D Printed from a PC Report 3 Report USB ue Printed from USB memory Box Ic Printed from Job Box Accepted Time Job reception time Day Month Year Hour Minutet Month Day Year Hour Minutet Year Month Day Hour Minutet User Name Printed user name User name Printed Pages Pages printed Page s No of pages i s Copies completed Copies specified t The display differs depending on the countries or regions Status Menu Job Status 0006 MABCDEFGHIJ E Detail 0006 Detail tn Job Name 1 6 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST Det
74. The following types of paper can be used Yes Can be stored No Cannot be stored Paper Source Paper Type MP Tray Paper Optional Optional Bulk Paper Casseffe Paper Feeder Paper Weight Duplex Path Feeder PF 315 PF 320 Plain Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes Transparency Yes No No Extra Heavy No Preprinted Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes Labels Yes No No Heavy 1 No Bond Yes Yes Yes Normal 3 Yes Recycled Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes Vellum Yes No No Light No Rough Yes Yes Yes Normal 3 Yes Letterhead Yes Yes Yes Normal 3 Yes Color Yes Yes Yes Normal 3 Yes Prepunched Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes Envelope Yes No Yes Heavy 3 No Cardstock Yes No No Heavy 3 No Thick Yes No No Heavy 3 No High Quality Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes Custom 1 to g t Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes t This is a paper type defined and registered by the user Up to eight types of user settings may be defined For details refer to Media Type Set Paper type settings on page 4 35 A 22 Appendix Specifications Note Specifications are subject to change without notice Machine Description Item FS 2100D FS 2100DN FS 4100DN FS 4200DN FS 4300DN Type Desktop Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor single drum system 60 to 120 g m Paper Weight Cassette MP Tray 60 to 220 g m 230 g m Cardstock Paper Types Cassette Plain Preprinted Bond Recycled Rough Letterhead
75. a lint free cloth to clean dust and dirt away from the vent on the right side of the machine 7 9 Maintenance Prolonged Non Use and Moving of the Printer Prolonged Non use If you ever leave the printer unused for a long period of time remove the power cord from the wall outlet We recommend you consult with your dealer about the additional actions you should take to avoid possible damage that may occur when the printer is used next time Moving the Printer When you move the printer Move it gently Keep it as level as possible to avoid spilling toner inside the printer Be sure to consult a service technician before attempting long distance transportation of the printer Keep the printer horizontal WARNING If you ship the printer remove and pack the developer unit in a plastic bag and ship them separately from the printer 8 Troubleshooting This chapter contains explanations on the following topics et BU AA AA Print Quality PrODIETNE mGA Error NGG m Clearing Paper ING TT TM If a problem cannot be corrected contact your service technician 8 1 Troubleshooting General Guidelines The table below provides basic solutions for problems you may encounter with the printer We suggest you consult this table to troubleshoot the problems before calling for service Symptom Check Items Correc
76. and Print the printer prints the menu map 9 Hee YOU me Pressing No Right Select returns to the Report Print menu Menu Map without printing the menu map Yes No ol Report Print gt Note The Menu numbers are printed on the Menu Map eeu ae a X outputted It is possible to use the numeric keys to enter the for Menu Map Menu number and display the settings required e g Displaying the Menu Map printing menu gt 02 Status Page 1 Press Menu 2 Press 1 on the Numeric Keys The Report Print menu appears 3 Press 1 on the Numeric Keys A confirmation message is displayed gt 03 Font List 4 10 Operation Panel Menu Map Sample Menu Map Printer PTT TTT LY Firmware version KYOCERA Operation Panel Status Page Printing a printer s status page You can check the printer s current status and option settings by printing a status page Print Are you sure Status Page Yes No Understanding the Status Page Inthe Report Print menu press A or V to select Status Page 2 Press OK A confirmation message is displayed Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set the screen for entering Job Accounting information is displayed Enter the Account ID and press OK Press Yes Left Select The message Accepted appears and the printer prints the status page Pressin
77. and connected Open System Preferences and click Print amp Fax 2 10 Preparation before Use 9 Click the plus symbol to add the installed printer driver L om ma dle Last Dswd Options amp Supplies Location location Ning Meme mo e m Sawn die L Share this printer on the network Default paper size A4 E id Click the lock to prevent further changes o 10 Click the IP icon for an IP connection and then enter the IP address and printer name Queue B Leave blank for default queue Name No Selection Location No Selection Print Using For a Bonjour connection click the default icon and select the printer for which Bonjour appears in Connection Bonjour a A Bonjour i mma Bonjour Bonjour o Bonjour 905 Bonjour Bonjour c Bonjour b Ramianue LL Name No Selection Location No Selection gt Print Using Add 2 11 Preparation before Use Protocol Line Printer Daemon LPD EX Address Se m 5 9 Valid and complete address Queue Fl Leave blank for default queue Print Using Kyocera FS 4300DN KPDL gt Installable Options Make sure your printer s options are accurately shown here so you can take full advantage of them For information on your printer and its optional hardware check the documentation that cam
78. and the Timer Setting menu reappears 4 93 Operation Panel USB KeyboardType USB keyboard type selection Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use 1 Inthe Device Common menu press A or V to select USB KeyboardType 2 Press OK The USB KeyboardType screen appears USB KeyboardType GG unga The available USB keyboard types are as follows g Europe US US France Europe US France Germany 3 Press A or V to select the desired USB keyboard type 4 Press OK The USB keyboard type is set and the Device Common menu reappears TonerAlert Level Setting for the alert level for toner addition This sets the toner addition alert level displayed on the status monitor 1 Inthe Device Common menu press A or V to select TonerAlert Level A 2 Press OK The Login screen appears Login User Name AA ERA Note When user login administration is set Login Password 8 When logged in as an administrator the log in screen is not displayed and the TonerAlert Level menu screen is displayed The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other than an administrator Log in again as an administrator Login N 3 With the Login User Name entry field selected press OK The Login User Name m Login User Name entry screen is displayed Text 4 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK The log in screen reappears
79. appears and Print the printer da the font list o Bee YOU BUE Pressing No Right Select returns to the Report Print menu Font List without dns the font list Yes No Font List Sample Font Name Scalable Bitmap Passwor d Selection FSET Font ID Si 4 14 Operation Panel RAM File List Printing a list of the files on the RAM disk This allows you to print a list of the files on the RAM disk IMPORTANT This is displayed when RAM Disk Mode is set to On PEINE Are you sure RAM File List Yes of No Inthe Report Print menu press A or V to select RAM File List Press OK A confirmation message is displayed Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set the screen for entering Job Accounting information is displayed Enter the Account ID and press OK Press Yes Left Select The message Accepted appears and the printer prints a list of the files held in the RAM disk Pressing No Right Select returns to the Report Print menu without printing the RAM disk file list SSD File List Printing a list of the files on the SSD This allows you to print a list of the files on the SSD IMPORTANT This is only displayed when the printer has an optional SSD HD 6 installed and the drive is correctly formatted Pint Are you sure SSD File List Yes J No
80. chapter contains explanations on the following topics Document BOX 59 9500410920 9 3 2 0 9 0 NN NAN RUN NANGKA 5 2 Custom BOX ro HEX POR EXE NRES MEX a a a a EBENE ERERAREA SEN S RERG TERES 5 4 Mn a 5 24 Computer settings Printer dEIVO uu aei sank iva b Hbbb a iu EsB p aEER PERLE a UAE n R n aaia D aaa 5 34 5 1 Document Box Document Box The Document Box is a function for saving print data from a computer onto the SSD optional SD SDHC Memory Card optional or RAM disk on the machine and then printing it by operating the operation panel Press Document Box to display the Document Box menu 2 ABC 3 DEF CO 5 KL jear 6mno fF Document Box 8 tuv 9wxvz 0 5 Maea Document Box has the following functions Custom Box 5 4 Job Box 5 24 Note When an SD SDHC Memory Card optional is installed it is possible to use Job Box Using the RAM disk makes it possible to use some of the Job Box functions Outline of Custom Box and Job Box The outline of Custom Box and Job Box and the options required are as follows Custom Box Job Box Primary function This is a general purpose box Print data can be stored to the Custom Box and then re used whenever necessary Job Box is a print function that
81. computer via a Web browser to check and change settings Printer Driver User Guide Describes how to install the printer driver and use printer functionality KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide Describes how to use functionality for printing PDF files without launching Adobe Acrobat or Reader KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide Describes how to monitor the network printing system with KYOCERA Net Viewer Card Authentication Kit B Operation Guide Describes how to authenticate to the machine using the ID card Data Security Kit E Operation Guide Describes how to install and configure the Data Security Kit PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference Describes the native printer language PRESCRIBE commands PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference Describes PRESCRIBE command functionality and control for each type of emulation Safety Conventions in This Guide The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user other individuals and surrounding objects and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine The symbols and their meanings are indicated below WARNING Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect A compliance with the related points CAUTION Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient attention to or A incorrect complianc
82. determined as a company participating in ENERGY STAR that this product has earned the ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR is a voluntary energy efficiency program with the goal of developing and promoting the use of products with high energy efficiency in order to help prevent global warming By purchasing ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR qualified products customers can help reduce emissions of greenhouse gases during product use and cut energy related costs EN ISO 7779 Der h chste Schalldruckpegel betr gt 70 dB A oder weniger gem EN ISO 7779 EK1 ITB 2000 Das Gerat ist nicht fur die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen Um st0rende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden Environment The service environmental conditions are as follows Temperature 50 to 90 5 F 10 to 32 5 C Humidity 15 to 80 However adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight Avoid locations with vibrations Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air Avoid poorly ventilated locations If the floor is delicate against casters when this machine is moved after installation the floor material may b
83. disk is activated The maximum RAM disk size is 16 MB or 4 MB on FS 2100D when no options are attached When the optional memory is installed The maximum RAM disk size is 1 2 of the total optional memory installed By default the RAM disk is set to On To activate RAM disk in the printer s memory first you must set the RAM disk mode to On and set the desired data size for the RAM disk as described in the following section This allows you to perform the following operations on the RAM disk Note The printer supports three types of storage device SD SDHC memory card optional SSD HD 6 and RAM amp disk The SD SDHC memory card and optional SSD HD 6 are installed into the dedicated slots of the printer The RAM disk is an allocated part of the printer s memory IMPORTANT The RAM disk can not be used when an optional SSD HD 6 is installed The RAM disk stores data only temporarily When the printer is reset or turned off the stored data will be erased The RAM disk allows some Job Box functions to be used The RAM disk is allocated from the printer memory available to users If the size of the RAM disk is set too large the printing speed may decrease or the memory may become insufficient The options available in RAM Disk Setting are as follows RAM Disk Mode Setting the RAM disk 4 82 RAM Disk Size RAM disk size setting 4 82 1 Inthe Device Common menu press A or V to select RAM Disk Setting n 2 Press
84. equipped with an energy saving control function for switching to a Sleep Mode where power consumption is automatically reduced to a minimum after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used For details refer to Energy Saver Function on page 2 21 Sleep The device automatically enters Sleep when 1 minute has passed since the device was last used The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened For more information refer to Sleep Timer Sleep timer timeout time section There are two sleep modes Quick Recovery and Energy Saver The default setting is Energy Saver mode Quick Recovery Mode The recovery from the sleep mode is faster than when using Energy Saver Mode The machine automatically recovers and prints when a job is detected Energy Saver Mode Makes it possible to reduce energy consumption even further than with Quick Recovery Mode Power Off Timer If the printer is not used while in sleep mode the power automatically turns off The Power Off Timer is used to set the time until the power turns off The factory setting for the time until the power turns off is 1 hour Duplex Printing This printer includes duplex printing as a standard function For example by printing two single sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a duplex printing it is possible to lower the amount of paper used Printing in duplex mode reduces paper consumption and contribut
85. from Sleep FS 2100DN mode FS 4100DN FS 4200DN 20 seconds or less FS 4300DN 25 seconds or less Duplexing Standard Paper supply capability 10096 recycled paper may be used Note Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types Glossary Additional memory An additional memory optional is used for increasing the memory capacity of this machine For DIMM that can be used in this machine contact your service technician AppleTalk AppleTalk offers file sharing and printer sharing and it also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk network Auto IP Auto IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup However DHCP requires a DHCP server Auto IP is a server less method of choosing an IP address IP addresses between 169 254 0 0 to 169 254 255 255 are reserved for Auto IP and assigned automatically Bonjour Bonjour also known as zero configuration networking is a service that automatically detects computers devices and services on an IP network Bonjour because an industry standard IP protocol is used allows devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353 If a firewall is enabled the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly So
86. has no effect on the printing speed Use the procedure below to select EcoPrint mode The default setting is of f 1 Inthe Print Quality menu press A or V to select EcoPrint 2 Press OK The EcoPrint screen appears EcoPrint Dn On 4 48 Operation Panel 3 4 Press A or V to select whether the EcoPrint mode is enabled Press OK The EcoPrint mode is set and the Print Quality menu screen reappears Print Resolution Selecting the Print Resolution You can set the default print resolution in four ways 300dpi 600dpi Fast1200 and Fine1200 The clarity of printed characters and graphics becomes sharper in this order Print Resolution 0 0 Fine1200 02 Fast1200 63 600dpi 1 2 Inthe Print Quality menu press A or V to select Print Resolution Press OK The Print Resolution screen appears Press A or V to select the Print Resolution Press OK The Print Resolution is set and the Print Quality menu screen reappears Print Density Selecting the Print Density The print density can be adjusted in five steps from 1 lighter to 5 darker The default setting is 3 Print Density pad Ok 1 lighter 1 2 Inthe Print Quality menu press A or V to select Print Density Press OK The Print Density screen appears Press A or V to select the print density from five steps from 1 lighter to 5 darker Press OK The print density is set an
87. in the figure in order to distribute the toner evenly inside the container Do not press too firmly on the center of the toner container or touch the toner feed slot IMPORTANT Do not touch the part of the toner container indicated on the diagram Do not touch the electrical parts of the toner container to avoid damaging them by static electricity 7 Setthe new toner container in the printer as shown in the figure 8 Push down on the top of the toner container to install it firmly in place Maintenance Lock lever 9 Turn the lock lever to the lock position 10 Close the top cover Note If the top cover top tray does not close check that the SS new toner container is installed correctly in step 7 After use always dispose of the toner container and the waste toner box in accordance with Federal State and Local rules and regulations Proceed to the next section Maintenance Replacing the Waste Toner Box Replace the waste toner box when the Check waste toner box Message is displayed A new waste toner box is included with the toner kit The waste toner box needs to be replaced before the printer will operate 1 Open the left cover While holding the waste toner box press the lock lever and then gently remove the waste toner box Note Remove the waste toner box as gently as possible so amp as not to scatter the toner inside Do not let the opening of the waste toner box face downward Close th
88. in the machine should be long grain Other Paper Properties Porosity Indicates the density of paper fiber Stiffness Limp paper may buckle in the machine resulting in paper jams Curl Most paper naturally tends to curl one way if left unpacked Electrostatic discharge During the printing process the paper is electrostatically charged to attract the toner The paper must be able to release this charge so that printed sheets do not cling together in the Output Tray Whiteness The contrast of the printed page depends on the whiteness of the paper Whiter paper provides a sharper brighter appearance Quality control Uneven sheet size corners that are not square ragged edges welded uncut sheets and crushed edges and corners can cause the machine to malfunction in various ways A quality paper supplier should take considerable care to ensure that these problems do not occur Packaging Paper should be packed in a sturdy carton to protect it from damage during transport Quality paper obtained from a reputable supplier is usually correctly packaged Note You might see the printer emitting steam in the area around the top tray if you use damp paper but it is safe to continue printing A 17 Appendix Special Paper The following types of special paper can be used Paper Type to be Used Paper Type to be Selected Overhead projector transparencies Transparency Rough paper Ro
89. information on the selected application by selecting Detail 13 Press OK 14 Press A or V to select Official Note To use the application as a trial select Trial and SV press OK The confirmation screen is displayed so press Yes Left Select 4 131 Operation Panel 15 Press OK License key pad OK 0000 9999 Uu 0000 16 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to enter the license key Note Some applications do not require you to enter a amp license key 17 Press OK License key Smid OK 0000 9999 1234 IMG 18 When the confirmation screen appears press Yes Left Select IMPORTANT If you change the date time while using an application you will no longer be able to use the application Note If a message prompting a restart is displayed after Ss changes have been made then obey the message and switch the machine OFF and ON again Checking Application Details Use the procedure below to check the details of an application 1 Inthe op Functions menu press A or V to select the application to check the details of R 2 Press OK DATA SECURITY pai OK License On Detail 3 Press A or V to select Detail 4 Press OK You can now view detailed information on the selected Detail NG application Function Name 1 4 DATA SECURITY Detail 4 132 5 Document Box This
90. ioi coca eria ee ERR aana S REIS PERS NEGI BEAN Replacing the Waste Toner BOX AABANGAN EA BEER sasaaina RM MERE Cleaning the Printe T 7 1 Maintenance Toner Container Replacement The printer displays messages at two stages of toner usage When the printer becomes low on toner the printer displays the message Toner is running out as the first caution Note the replacement is not always necessary at this stage Prepare the new toner kit Ifyou ignore the above message and continue printing the printer displays the message Replace the toner just before the toner is used up The printer will stop printing The toner container must be replaced immediately Refer to Replacing the Toner Container on page 7 3 Frequency of Toner Container Replacement The life of the toner containers depends on the amount of toner required to accomplish your printing jobs According to ISO IEC 19752 and EcoPrint switched off the toner container can print as follows A4 Letter paper is assumed 12 500 images FS 2100D and FS 2100DN 15 500 images FS 4100DN 21 000 images FS 4200DN for the U S A or 25 000 images FS 4200DN for destination other than the U S A and FS 4300DN Starter Toner Container The toner container packed with the new printer is a starter toner container The starter toner container lasts an average of 6 000 images FS 2100D and FS 2100DN 8 000 images FS 4100DN or
91. is set and the Bulk Feeder Set menu screen reappears Media Type Set Paper type settings You can set the paper thickness by selecting a paper weight This allows you to set the paper thickness for each of the media types that can be used on the printer And for custom paper registered in the printer up to 8 you can specify paper thickness and whether duplex printing is permitted For the procedure for registering custom paper sizes refer to Custom PaperSize Setting a Custom Paper Size on page 4 31 For normal settings refer to Setting the Paper Thickness on page 4 35 For custom paper settings refer to Custom Paper Settings on page 4 36 The options available in Media Type Set menu are as follows Setting the Paper Thickness 4 35 Custom Paper Settings 4 36 Setting the Paper Thickness You can set the paper thickness by selecting a paper weight The available paper weights are as follows Extra Heavy Heavy 3 Heavy 2 Heavy 1 Normal 3 Normal 2 Normal 1 Light The default setting is Normal 2 for plain paper When using any paper other than plain paper you should change the paper weight referring to the table below to achieve the best possible print quality for each paper Z Note Depending on the type of paper the toner may not adhere to the paper properly To solve this problem select amp the half speed mode from the printer driver For more information refer to Half Speed Mode Printe
92. large number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned dpi dots per inch A unit for resolution representing the number of dots printed per inch 25 4 mm EcoPrint This is a printing mode that reduces toner consumption Pages printed in the EcoPrint mode are lighter than pages printed in the normal mode Glossary 1 Glossary Emulation The function to interpret and execute other printers page description languages Form Feed Timeout While data is being sent to a printer some pauses may occur At this time the printer waits for the next data without making a page break Form feed timeout is a function to wait only a preset amount of time before it executes an automatic page break After the waiting period begins once the designated amount of time is exceeded the printer will automatically process the currently received data and print it out If the machine has received no print data for the last page the printer ends processing of that job without outputting paper IP Address Internet Protocol Address An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots e g 192 168 110 171 Each number should be between 0 and 255 IPP IPP Internet Printing Protocol is a standard that uses TCP IP networks such as the Internet
93. makes the Job Retention function possible Job Retention has four modes as summarized below Quick Copy To later print additional copies Proof and Hold To proof the first copy before printing multiple copies Private Print To hold the document in printer to prevent unauthorized access Stored Job To electronically store documents such as fax cover pages Start storing by Printer driver Printer driver Adding more boxes Yes to a maximum of 1 000 boxes No Password setting Yes Yes possible in Private Print and Stored Job Data after printing Stored Stored except Private Print Support for User Login Administration Yes The users can be set separately for each Box No Document Box Custom Box Job Box Installation SSD Available Available mpuens SD SDHC Not available Available Memory Card RAM disk use Not available Available Only Proof and Hold and Private Print can be used Note For information on the optional SSD and SD SDHC memory cards refer to About the Options on page A 5 For information on the RAM disk refer to RAM Disk Setting Using the RAM disk on page 4 81 For the formatting of the SSD refer to Format SSD Formatting the SSD on page 4 82 For the formatting of the SD SDHC Memory Card refer to Format SD Card Formatting the SD SDHC memory card on page 4 83 5 3 Document Box Custom Box IMPORTANT To use a Cu
94. maximum length of the login user name is 64 characters Login Password When Other is selected for Authentication the password entered here will be used for authentication The maximum length of the login password is 64 characters SMTP Security Enables or disables the SMTP Security When this protocol is enabled either SSL TLS or STARTTLS must be selected To enable SMTP security the SMTP port number may have to be changed according to the server settings Typically 465 for SSL TLS and 25 or 587 for STARTTLS are used for SMTP ports POP before SMTP Timeout Set the amount of time to wait in seconds before time out when you have selected POP before SMTP as the Authentication Protocol Test This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established E mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E mail that can be sent in kilobytes When the value is 0 the limitation for E mail size is disabled Sender Address Enter the E mail address of the person responsible for the machine such as the machine administrator so that a reply or non delivery report will go to a person rather than to the machine The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication The maximum length of the sender address is 128 characters Signature Enter the signature The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of the E mail body It is occasionally used for further identification of the pri
95. mm Page Sizes Oficio I E 1 0 Orientation Duplex Portrait Custom page size Landscape Rotated Copies Height 148 0 gt mm Width 210 0 gt mm 1 EcoPrint ES 7 Collate Print preview D KYOCERA l Profiles cance Display the print settings screen Click the Basic tab Click Page Sizes to register the size Click New Enter the name of the paper Enter the paper size Click OK Select the page size name registered in steps 4 to 7 Select MP Tray 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 O Select Cardstock or Envelope 3 4 Printing Printer Driver Help The printer driver includes Help To learn more about print settings display the printer driver print settings screen and display Help using either of the methods explained below 2 4 1 Click in the upper right corner of the screen oee WES 2 Click the item you want to know about Quick Print Basic Layout Imaging Publishing Job Advanced Print size Media type BA Unspecified Y ie 8 Destination Auto source selection sA Printer default pam BAIE SA rn Orientation Duplex AE Portrait ARS E Landscape E Rotated Copies Quality 1 EcoPrint V Collate CT Print preview CR KYOCERA Profiles LL ex Cancel k Changing the default printer driver settings Windows 7 The default printer driver setting
96. of the top cover FS xxxxxxx 3 Optical unit When checking the optical unit avoid direct exposure to the laser beam which is invisible Shown at below is the label located on the cover of the optical unit DANGER CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM ATTENTION CLASE 3B RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT KLASSE 3B LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ATTENZIONE CLASSE 3B RADIAZIONE LASER IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO PRECAUCION CLASSE 3B RADIACIONE LASER CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO VARO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LUOKAN 3B LASERSATEILYLLE ALA KATSO SATEESEEN BG BUMABARA HAETRSA ROR TREE RAR 5 RETIENE NAETEREHEN TILA HA CLASS 3B 71 HolABAS YA HIANS MG cohkmer2223Bb U kthckS U AXIEBERIED BrUsLYe e amp t 4 Maintenance For safety of the service personnel follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual xi Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power USA Caution The power plug is the main isolation device Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source Attention Le d branchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l appareil hors tension Les interrupteurs sur l appareil ne sont que des inte
97. press Alt Left Select to display Alternative and you can change the source for paper feeding You can abandon printing by pressing Cancel Loading paper The selected cassette is being prepared Low security This message is displayed when Low was selected in Security Level 8 12 Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action represents a mechanical error 0 1 2 Call for service The printer Machine failure does not operate when this message is displayed The total number of pages Call service 0123456 printed is also indicated e g 0123456 Match the paper type And the envelope switch position Displayed when the paper type does not match the envelope switch setting TU cannot be Memory is Print job processed completely The total amount of data received by the printer exceeds the printer s internal memory Try adding more memory Press OK to resume printing You can abandon printing by pressing Cancel If Auto Error Clear is set to On printing will be automatically resumed after a preset period of time No multi copies Press OK Multi copies cannot be printed because RAM disk is disabled or the SSD is not installed Try adding more memory or installing SSD and configuring the RAM disk settings Non genuine Toner Press Help This message is displayed if
98. printer in the reverse procedure to when it was removed 4 Format the SD SDHC memory card from the operation panel For the procedure for formatting refer to Format SD Card Formatting the SD SDHC memory card on page 4 83 PF 320 Paper Feeder The optional paper feeder PF 320 will each hold approximately 500 sheets of paper Up to 4 optional feeders can be added to the bottom of the printer allowing continuous feeding of up to 2 500 sheets of paper when combined with the printer s own cassette IMPORTANT When you use the paper feeder place the papers print side down The papers that can be used in the cassettes supplied with the paper feeders are as follows Paper size Envelope Monarch Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope DL Envelope C5 A5 B5 B6 ISO B5 A4 Executive Letter Legal OufukuHagaki Oficio Il Statement Folio Youkei 2 Youkei 4 216 x 340 mm 16K and Other 92 x 162 mm to 216 x 356 mm A 9 Appendix Paper type Plain Preprinted Bond Recycled Rough Letterhead Color Prepunched Envelope High Quality CUSTOM 1 to 8 SSD HD 6 With SSD installed in the printer received data can be rasterized and stored on this SSD This enables high speed printing of multiple copies using an electric sort function Also you can use the Document Box functions For details refer to Document Box on page 5 1 The network interface kit is a high speed interface for communications spee
99. reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login User Name is Admin For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 x 6 Press or V to selectthe Login Password entry field Login User Name W Admin Login Password Login 4 120 Operation Panel Login Password ABC Text Login User Name 7 Admin Login Password Login User Job Account NG User Login Set Job Account Set Exit Job Account Set m Account Report Each Job Account Exit Job Accounting Eua OK o1 Off 02 On 7 Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed 8 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK The login screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login Password is Admin For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 9 Pressing Login Right Select If the entered Login User Name and Login Password are correct the User Job Account menu Screen appears 10 Press or V to select Job Account Set 11 Press OK The Job Account Set menu appears Job Accounting Job Accounting settings This allows you to turn the Job Accounting function On and Of f 1 Inthe Job Account Set menu press A or V to select Job Accounting 2 Press OK The Job Accounting screen appe
100. that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help The use of a non shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited CAUTION The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device The above warning is valid only in the United States of America Interface connectors IMPORTANT Be sure to power off the printer before connecting or disconnecting an interface cable For protection against static electricity discharge to the printer s internal electronics through the interface connector s cover any interface connector that is not in use with the protective cap supplied Note Use shielded interface cables Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Avis de conformit aux normes du minist re des Communications du Canada Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada vii Energy Saving Control Function To reduce energy consumption while in a waiting state the device comes
101. the numeric values of those expressions Printing remains clear even if you enlarge fonts since the characters are defined with outlines represented with numerical expressions You can specify the font size in steps of 0 25 points up to 999 75 points POP3 Post office Protocol 3 A standard protocol to receive E mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet PostScript A page description language developed by Adobe Systems It enables flexible font functions and highly functional graphics allowing higher quality printing The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985 followed by Level 2 that enabled color Glossary 2 Glossary printing and two byte languages e g Japanese in 1990 In 1996 Level 3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies PPM Prints Per Minute This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute Printer driver The software to enable you to print data created on any application software The printer driver for the machine is contained in the Product Library disc enclosed in the package Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine RA Stateless The IPv6 router communicates transmits information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6 This information is the Router Advertisement RA ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Proto
102. the paper Moisture can affect the paper s appearance feed ability curl electrostatic properties and toner fusing characteristics The moisture content of the paper varies with the relative humidity in the room When the relative humidity is high and the paper absorbs moisture the paper edges expand becoming wavy in appearance When the relative humidity is low and the paper loses moisture the edges shrink and tighten and print contrast may suffer Wavy or tight edges can cause jams and alignment anomalies The moisture content of the paper should be 4 to 6 To ensure correct moisture content it is important to store the paper in a controlled environment Some tips on moisture control are Store paper in a cool dry location Keep the paper in its wrapping as long as possible Re wrap paper that is not in use Store paper in its original carton Place a pallet etc under the carton to separate it from the floor After removing paper from storage let it stand in the same room as the machine for 48 hours before use Avoid leaving paper where it is exposed to heat sunlight or damp Note When using coated paper be aware that the sheets will stick together in a very humid environment Paper Grain When paper is manufactured it is cut into sheets with the grain running parallel to the length long grain or parallel to the width short grain Short grain paper can cause feeding problems in the machine All paper used
103. the rear cover The printer warms up and resumes printing out Bulk Paper Feeder Paper is jammed at the optional bulk paper feeder Detach the bulk paper feeder from the printer by sliding with the rail away from the printer holding the bulk paper feeder by both hands If paper is partially fed out from the feeder s output slot pull the paper out by hand For details refer to the PF 315 Installation Guide 8 23 Troubleshooting 8 24 Appendix This chapter contains explanations on the following topics Character Entry Method e T m A 2 About the OPO Ss i cass casssdudeavawpaseceacscata sandacoduys davon sacuuecaugaeeccanceseeed loans SERE QNEM cdeyueasenetusnvess UR EAST AVE A 5 Expansion Memory Modules M A 6 General Description GF OPGONS ma AANI NAGANA RAR A 9 gae A A NANA AA AA AA A AA A 13 SpecificatiohS HR A 23 For availability of the options consult your service technician Appendix Character Entry Method In character entry screens use the procedure below to enter characters Keys Used Use the following keys to enter characters Document Box Back Key Press this key to return to the screen from which you invoked the character entry screen Numeric Keys Use these keys
104. the status page Are you sures Check the amount of memory with the printed status page If the Status Page memory addition has been done correctly the total amount of memory will have increased The amount of memory when shipped Yes l No from the factory is 256 MB or 128 MB on FS 2100D A 8 Appendix General Description of Options SD SDHC Memory Card The printer is equipped with a slot for an SDHC memory card with a maximum size of 32 GB and an SD memory card with a maximum size of 2 GB An SD SDHC memory card is useful for storing fonts macros and overlays This enables high speed printing of multiple copies using an electric sort function Also you can use the Job Box functions For details refer to Job Box on page 5 24 Reading the SD SDHC Memory Card Once inserted in the printer s slot the contents of the SD SDHC memory card can be read from the operation panel or automatically when you power on or reset the printer Installing and Formatting the SD SDHC Memory Card To use an unused SD SDHC memory card you must first use the printer to format the SD SDHC memory card 1 Switch off the printer remove the power cord and then remove the main controller unit To read how to remove the main controller unit refer to the section on inserting the memory module Insert the SD SDHC memory card into the SD SDHC memory card SD SDHC slot Memory Card Slot 3 Attach the main controller unit to the
105. was not detected It was not possible to connect to the network with the optional wireless network interface kit Check the settings of the wireless network interface For details refer to Optional Network Optional Network settings on page 4 62 Account error Press OK This message is displayed when the Job Accounting function is enabled and an attempt to specify job accounting settings or to register or delete an account fails To return the printer to the print ready status press OK Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action Add paper in casset The paper has run out in the paper source displayed Supply paper according to the paper source displayed paper cassettes MP tray or optional paper feeders Add paper in MP tray Administrator only You can only change the settings selected when logged in as a user with administrator privileges When the cassette does not contain any paper that matches the print data Alternative paper size and type this message allows you to specify an alternative i A5 Bond cassette to use instead A paper source number is only displayed when an AS Plain optional paper feeder is installed To print from a different paper source refer to A4 Preprint Paper Feed Mode Setting the paper feed source on page 4 40 The box capacity is full Box limit exceeded Either delete files or c
106. 0 FS 4100DN 4500 FS 4200DN 5000 FS 4300DN 6000 Login User Name Admin Login Password FS 2100D 4000 FS 2100DN 4000 FS 4100DN 4500 FS 4200DN 5000 FS 4300DN 6000 Login Password Admin Access Level Machine Administrator Access Level Administrator Changing the administrator information It is possible to change the administrator information Use the procedure below to change the details registered Note Log in as DeviceAdmin to change the administrator information When logged in as Admin it is only possible amp to check the administrator information 1 Inthe User Login Set menu press A or V to select Local User List Local User List NG 2 Press OK The Local User List screen appears 3 Press or V to select the administrator to change LJ 2g DeviceAdmin Detail Tn User Name Lf 5 Admin 4 116 4 Press OK The detailed information for the user is displayed Operation Panel To change the Login User Name Detail n Login User Name 2 5 Admin Edit Login User Name 0 Admini ABC Text To change the Login Password Detail n Login Password 3 5 066660060000 Edit New Password pad OK ABC Text Confirm Password gt ABC Text 10 11 12 Press lt or gt to select Login User Name Pressing Edit Right Select
107. 1 Inthe Timer Setting menu press A or V to select PanelReset Timer F 2 Press OK The PanelReset Timer screen appears PanelReset Timer mM 5 495 EM sec 2 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the panel reset time 4 Press OK The panel reset time setting is stored and the Timer Setting menu reappears Sleep Level Set Sleep level setting There are two sleep modes with different levels of sleep Quick Recovery and Energy Saver Quick Recovery Mode The recovery from the sleep mode is faster than when using Energy Saver mode Energy Saver Mode This makes it possible to reduce energy consumption even further than with Quick Recovery mode With Energy Saver mode you can set whether to enable the Energy Saver mode for each separate function Note For information on the Quick Recovery mode and Energy Saver mode refer to Energy Saver Function on page 2 21 Sleep Level Set menu is not displayed when the optional network interface kit IB 50 or wireless network interface kit IB 51 has been installed 1 Inthe Timer Setting menu press A or V to select Sleep Level Set 2 Press OK The Sleep Level Set menu screen appears Sleep Level Set 4 Sleep Level Status 3 Press A or V to select Sleep Level 4 Press OK The Sleep Level screen appears Sleep Level Kad OK Quick Recovery 0J Energy Saver o Press A or V to select Quick Recovery OrEnergy Saver
108. 2 Canceling a ZUM Me 3 2 Printer driver print settings SOFBONiaesassui pa bRE E DAS SEE E ERbIRAXRRIMS A RAE NP FA ARAS UC RM PAM M HERR PEL AMA MM QUIDEM sains 3 3 Registering a page SIZE m 3 4 Printer Driver EGU TT 3 5 Printing PD Ca AA AP 3 6 3 1 Printing Printing from Applications This section provides basic instructions for printing documents Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 7 To print the document from applications install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied Product Library disc Note Refer to Installing Software on page 2 7 Follow the steps below to print documents from applications pr Paper Print size L KX Printing Preferences Quick Print Basic Layout Imaging Publishing Job Advanced Media type m A4 10098 nb Unspecified x Source Page Sizes Orientation Portrait Landscape Copies Rotated 1 V Collate Print preview Auto source selection O KYOCERA Profiles Destination EcoPrint Lo J Cone 4 Canceling a Printing Job C dear CI CI Document Box 1 2 o 7 Create a document using an applicatio
109. 20 paper feeder cokes eRe BANA ee he oe Ae E dE 8 20 rear Unit eus os again ed eR A ee eRe Ea 8 23 Code Set i l 22s euo REED hh wee bees 4 47 Colored Paper cece eee A 21 Command Center RX 2 2 17 COPE Saue Adi Gn leis bee Rhap d 4 50 COUNIGK IDEE 4 25 CR Action uses Kaka Fake Ric ba ee ee 4 51 Custom BOX napaamin m x OR x E 5 4 Printer divers ius exor reci gore OE nim eek Rees 5 34 Custom Paper Size Duplex Printing iii het vat heehee ead eee 4 37 Paper Size dene ee Ru eee eee 4 31 Paper Weight 00000 4 36 D Data Security sescent nabs eene eed Ea kes 4 106 Security Password 0000 00 cece eee eee 4 107 SSD Initialization 00000 02 eee ee eee 4 107 Data Security Kit eee eee A 12 Date Setting 225 diee PARADA AG ee ond eee 4 76 DIET E Glossary 1 Developer Unit 2 06 02 pa sno ee Ee Rene Res 1 3 DHCP REED Glossary 1 DIMM erete iie cenin E USE NAAN dae RR ERU A 5 Display backlight llle 4 84 Display brightness 2 2 0 2 20 essen gn 4 83 Document Box 00000 c eects 5 2 Document Box default screen 4 75 Duplex Front Cover 0 1 3 Duplex Printing 002 eee eee 4 41 Binding Modes 00 0c cece eee ee eee eee 4 41 Permitted with custom paper 4 38 Duplex unit clearing paper jams a 8 21 Dynamic Domain Name System DDNS 2 18 E EcoPriNb i kana ed hace E
110. 2100DN on page 2 27 Since the composition of an envelope is more complex than that of ordinary paper it is not always possible to ensure consistent printing quality over the entire envelope surface Normally envelopes have a diagonal grain direction Refer to Paper Grain on page A 17 This direction can easily cause wrinkles and creases when envelopes pass through the printer Before purchasing envelopes make a test print to check whether the printer accepts the envelope Do not use envelopes that have an encapsulated liquid adhesive Avoid a long printing session for envelopes only Extended envelope printing can cause premature printer wear If jams occur try setting a lesser number of envelopes on the MP tray To avoid jams caused by curled envelopes stack no more than 5 printed envelopes on the top tray A 20 Appendix Thick Paper Fan the stack of paper and align the edges before loading them in the MP tray Some types of paper have rough edges on the back those are created when the paper is cut In this case put the paper on a flat place and rub the edges once or twice with for example a ruler to smooth them Feeding rough edged paper may cause paper jams Note Ifthe paper jams even after you smooth it out load the amp paper in the MP tray with the leading edge rose up a few millimeters as shown in the illustration Colored Paper Colored paper should satisfy the same conditions as white bon
111. 3 hours 3 Press A or V to select the time until the power goes off automatically The times that can be set are 1 hour 2 hours 3 hours 4 hours 5 hours 6 hours 9 hours 12 hours 1 day 2 days 3 days 4 days 5 days 6 days and 1 week 4 Press OK Set the time until the power switches off and the Timer Setting menu reappears Auto Err Clear Auto error clear setting If an error that still allows you to continue printing occurs the next received data is automatically printed after a set period of time elapses For example if the printer is shared over a network as a network printer and one person causes one of the above errors after the set period of time elapses the data sent from the next person is printed The default setting is of Auto Error Clear disabled The auto clear errors are Print overrun KPDL error SSD error RAM disk error SD card error Incorrect account ID Account error 4 91 Operation Panel Cannot duplex print on this paper Job Accounting restriction exceeded No multi copies USB memory error Restricted by Job Accounting Job not stored For the procedure for setting the automatic error recovery time refer to Err Clear Timer Setting the error clear time on page 4 92 1 Inthe Timer Setting menu press A or V to select Auto Err Clear 7 2 Press OK The Auto Err Clear screen appears Auto Err Clear m o Off 02 On 3
112. 4 With the Login User Name entry field selected press OK The a A Login User Name 9 H Login User Name entry screen is displayed i ABC Text 5 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK The log in screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login User Name is Admin For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 6 Press or V to selectthe Login Password entry field Login User Name Admin Login Password Login 4 130 Operation Panel Login Password ABC Text Login User Name 7 Admin Login Password Login Op Functions Dn ID Card UG 33 Exit DATA SECURITY D License On Detail License On D Official 7 Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed 8 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK The login screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login Password is Admin For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 9 Pressing Login Right Select If the entered Login User Name and Login Password are correct the Op Functions menu appears 10 Press or V to select the desired application 11 Press OK 12 Press or V to select License On Note You can view detailed
113. 4 page 78 characters at 10 pitches and Letter size page 80 characters at 10 pitches This setting is only effective in PCL 6 emulation 1 Inthe Page Setting menu press A or V to select Wide A4 Operation Panel Wide A4 On Press OK The Wide A4 screen appears Press or V to select whether Wide A4 mode is enabled Press OK The wide mode setting is set and the Page Setting menu reappears XPS FitTo Page Adjusting the XPS file print out size Select On in this setting to enlarge or reduce XPS files to fit the printable area during printing XPS FitTo Page Dn 2 On 1 2 C In the Page Setting menu press A or V to select XPS FitTo Page Press OK The XPS FitTo Page screen appears Press A or V to select whether XPS FitTo Page mode is enabled Press OK The XPS FitTo Page setting is set and the Page Setting menu reappears TIFF JPEG Size Adjusting the TIFF JPEG file print out size Use this setting to select the printing method used when TIFF or JPEG files are printed directly Image Print TIFF JPEG Size lt gt Resolution Resolution 1 2 In the Page Setting menu press A or V to select TIFF JPEG Size Press OK The TIFF JPEG Size screen appears The options available in TIFF JPEG Size are as follows Paper Size default Images are resized so that they fill the paper size when printed Image Resoluti
114. 48 Page Setting Setting pagination 4 50 User Name The User Name display settings 4 53 Job Name The Job Name display settings 4 53 1 Press Menu Print Settings Dn MP Tray Priority Paper Feed Mode Exit 2 Press or V to select Print Settings 3 Press OK The Print Settings menu appears showing a list of available options Paper Source Selecting the paper feed source You can select the paper source from which the printer feeds paper as the default If an optional paper feeder s is installed it can also be set the default paper source 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Paper Source Paper Source tm MP Tray 2 Cassette 1 available paper sources MP Tray feeders are shown 3 Press or V to select the desired paper source The available paper sources are as follows Cassette 1 printer s standard paper cassette 2 Press OK The Paper Source screen appears showing a list of the Cassette 2 to 5 optional paper feeders only installed paper 4 Press OK The paper source is set and the Print Settings menu reappears MP Tray Priority the settings for priority paper feed from the MP tray If paper is set in the MP Tray then it is possible for priority to be given to that MP tray in the paper feed 4 39 Operation Panel MP Tray Priority Gg o1 O 02 Auto Feed Always In the Print Settings menu press
115. 5 32 Document Box JobRet Deletion BB o Off 2 1 hour 4 hours 4 Press or V to select the desired Automatic Delete time The list shows the following times Off automatic delete is not performed 1 hour deleted in 1 hour 4 hours deleted in 4 hours 1 day deleted on the next day 1 week deleted after one week Press OK The setting is stored and the Job Box Setting menu reappears Storage Media Selecting the storage media for the jobs If the optional SSD and SD SDHC memory card are both installed it is possible to select which storage media to use Note After this setting has been done turn the machine OFF and ON again This is mandatory to make the settings effective Job Box Setting m JobRet Deletion Storage Media Exit Storage Media pad OK COME 62 sD Card In the Job Box menu press A or V to select Job Box Setting Press OK The Job Box Setting screen appears Press A or V to select Storage Media and press OK The Storage Media screen appears Press A or V to select the desired storage media The list shows the following media SSD SD Card Press OK The setting is stored and the Job Box Setting menu reappears 5 33 Document Box Computer settings Printer driver Use the procedure below to store data in a Custom Box or a Job Box Document Box 1 From the application File menu select Pr
116. 63 x 6 5 inches No No Yes Yes Yes ISO B5 176 x 250 mm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Hagaki 100 x 148 mm No No No Yes Yes OufukuHagaki 148 x 200 mm No Yes Yes Yes Yes Oficio II 8 5 x 13 inches Yes Yes Yes No Yes A 15 Appendix Cassette N Cassette Puk papet Paper Size Size ah a l FS 4200DN PF 320 a MP Tray FS 4300DN 216 x 340 mm 216 x 340 mm Yes Yes Yes No Yes 16 kai 197 x 273 mm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Statement 5 5 x 8 5 inches Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Folio 210 x 330 mm Yes Yes Yes No Yes Youkei 4 105 x 235 mm No No Yes Yes Yes Youkei 2 114 x 162 mm No No Yes Yes Yes Custom Cassette FS 2100D FS 2100DN 140 to 216 mm x 210 to 356 mm 5 5 to 8 5 inches x 8 25 to 14 02 inches Cassette FS 4100DN FS 4200DN FS 4300DN 105 to 216 mm x 148 to 356 mm 4 13 to 8 5 inches x 5 83 to 14 02 inches Cassette PF 320 92 to 216 mm x 162 to 356 mm 3 62 to 8 5 inches x 6 38 to 14 02 inches MP Tray 70 to 216 mm x 148 to 356 mm 2 76 to 8 5 inches x 5 83 to 14 02 inches Bulk Paper Feeder PF 315 76 to 216 mm x 148 to 305 mm 2 99 to 8 5 inches x 5 83 to 12 01 inches t The paper size can be specified using the printer driver However feeding paper depends on the paper type Smoothness The paper should have a smooth uncoated surface Paper with a rough or sandy surface can cause voids in the printed output Paper that is too smooth can cause multiple feeding and fogging problems
117. 64bit Server 2003 32bit 64bit Server 2008 32bit 64bit NetWare 3 x 4 x 5 x 6 x MacOS 9 x Mac OS X PowerPC Ver 10 3 x Ver 10 5 5 Intel Ver 10 4 4 Ver 10 6 x UNIX A 29 Appendix Item Description Network protocols IPv6 Apple Bonjour Compatible DHCPv6 DNSv6 FTP FTPS HTTP HTTPS IPPS ICMPv6 IKEv1 IPP IPPS Kerberos LDAP LPD POP3 RawPort SLP SMTP SNMP SNMPv1 v2c v3 SNTP ThinPrint IPv4 Apple Bonjour Compatible BOOTP DHCP DNS FTP FTPS HTTP HTTPS ICMP IPP IPPS KCP Kerberos LDAP LPD NetBIOS over TCP IP POP3 POP3 over SSL RawPort SLP SMTP SNMP SNMPv1 v2c v3 SNTP ThinPrint WINS Other AppleTalk IPX SPX LLTD NetBEUI NetWare NDS Bindery Security protocols EAP TLS IKE PEAP SNMPv3 SSL TLS HTTPS Operating conditions 0 to 60 C 20 to 80 96 RH no condensation Storage conditions 20 to 50 C 20 to 90 96 RH no condensation EMI conformity FCC Class B USA CE EU VCCI Class B Japan Parallel Interface Kit IB 32 Option Item Description Installation Environment Conforms to the machine s installation environment Interface Parallel Interface x 1 IEEE 1284 compliant Power supply From the machine Environmental Specifications Item Description Time to Sleep mode default setting 1 minute Recovery time FS 2100D 15 seconds or less
118. ASSE 3B RADIACIONE LASER CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LUOKAN 3B LASERSATEILYLLE ALA KATSO SATEESEEN LC BEMABIMEER 117 TIE EH CIERRE MEARAN GS RETA BRAXET NAGFTEREAEN FREER ERAT s WE CLASS 3B 7H alolx sm AG HIANS CCEBCCZSA3BL U JX cd E A EB amp RIED fire feu xiii About the Operation Guide This Operation Guide has the following chapters Chapter 1 Machine Parts This chapter explains the names of parts Chapter 2 Preparation before Use This chapter explains the preparations and settings necessary before use and the method for loading paper Chapter 3 Printing This chapter explains the method for printing from a computer Chapter 4 Operation Panel This chapter explains how to use the operation panel to configure the printer Chapter 5 Document Box This chapter explains about the Document Box function Chapter 6 Status Menu This chapter explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print Chapter 7 Maintenance This chapter explains about the replacement of toner container and the cleaning of the printer Chapter 8 Troubleshooting This chapter explains how to handle error messages paper jams and other problems Appendix This section explains the method for entering characters an introduction to optional products and the printer specifications Conventions This manu
119. D Recipient 1 E mail Recipient 2 E mail Recipient 3 SMTP Protocol On 9 off SMTP Port Number 25 SMTP Server Name SMTP Server Timeout 10 seconds Authentication Protocol On POP before SMTP POP3 Account 1 POP3 Account 2 POP3 Account t 3 Authenticate as Other Preparation before Use Item 2 Enter the correct settings in each field The settings to be specified in the SMTP settings screen are shown below Description SMTP Protocol Enables or disables SMTP protocol To use E mail this protocol must be enabled SMTP Port Number Set the SMTP Port Number Normally use the port No 25 SMTP Server Name Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name The maximum length of the SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters If entering the server name an IP address of DNS server must also be configured The DNS server address can be entered on the TCP IP setting screen SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time in seconds to wait before time out Authentication Protocol Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP as the protocol The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000 Authenticate as Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a different account Login User Name When Other is selected for Authentication the login user name entered here will be used for SMTP authentication The
120. ER AA Pa Ux tina Gums FARO a Ia RECO S Rosai AA AA A 13 Specifications gaze gts aces iy stu aston ARNAN EM M MCI LIE PM ED MEE UE LM E UU AUS A 23 Glossary Index Legal and Safety Information A CAUTION NO LIABILITY IS ASSUMED FOR ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY IMPROPER INSTALLATION Notice on Software SOFTWARE USED WITH THIS PRINTER MUST SUPPORT THE PRINTER S EMULATION MODE The printer is factory set to emulate the PCL or KPDL Notice The information in this guide is subject to change without notification Additional pages may be inserted in future editions The user is asked to excuse any technical inaccuracies or typographical errors in the present edition No responsibility is assumed if accidents occur while the user is following the instructions in this guide No responsibility is assumed for defects in the printer s firmware contents of its read only memory This guide any copyrightable subject matter sold or provided with or in connection with the sale of the page printer are protected by copyright All rights are reserved Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide any copyrightable subject matter without the prior written consent of KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc is prohibited Any copies made of all or part of this guide any copyrightable subject must contain the same copyright notice as the material from which the copying is done Regarding Trade Names PRESCRIBE and KPDL are trademarks of Kyocer
121. Entry X U 4 13 8 50 EET o 9 In the Cassette Set menu press A or V to select Custom PaperSize shows the number of the cassette installed in the printer 1 to 5 Press OK The Custom PaperSize menu screen appears Press or V to select Measurement Press OK The Measurement menu screen appears Press A or V to select the paper size units and then press OK The unit for entering the paper size is set and the Custom PaperSize menu screen reappears Press A or V toselect Size Entry Y Press OK The Size Entry Y menu screen appears Use the numeric keys or press A or V to enter the paper length The range of paper lengths you can set for each cassette is as follows Cassette FS 2100D FS 2100DN 210 to 356 mm 8 25 to 14 02 inches Cassette FS 4100DN FS 4200DN FS 4300DN 148 to 356 mm 5 83 to 14 02 inches Paper Feeder PF 320 162 to 356 mm 6 38 to 14 02 inches Press OK The entered paper length is set and the Custom PaperSize menu screen reappears 10 Press or V toselect Size Entry X 11 Press OK The size Entry X menu screen appears 4 32 Operation Panel 12 Use the numeric keys or A or V to enter the paper width The range of paper widths you can set for each cassette is as follows Cassette FS 2100D FS 2100DN 140 to 216 mm 5 5 to 8 5 inches Cassette FS 4100DN FS 4200DN FS 4300DN 105 to 216 mm 4 13 to 8 5 inches
122. FTPS HTTP HTTPS ICMP IPP IPPS KCP Kerberos LDAP LPD NetBIOS over TCP IP POP3 POP3 over SSL RawPort SLP SMTP SNMP SNMPv1 v2c v3 SNTP ThinPrint WINS Other AppleTalk IPX SPX LLTD NetBEUI NetWare NDS Bindery Security protocols EAP TLS EAP TTLS EAP FAST IKE PEAP SNMPv3 SSL TLS HTTPS Operating conditions Storage conditions 0 to 70 C 20 to 80 RH no condensation 20 to 50 C 20 to 90 96 RH no condensation EMI conformity FCC Class B USA CE EU VCCI Class B Japan A 28 Appendix Wireless Network Interface Kit IB 51 Option Item Description CPU SoC 88F6180 RAM 64 MBytes ROM 16 MBytes Wireless network IEEE802 11b Frequency 2 4GHz interf a Aa Transmission DS SS system Transmission 1 2 5 5 11 Mbps speed Channel 1 11ch IEEE802 11g Frequency 2 4GHz Transmission OFDM system Transmission 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 54 Mbps speed Channel 1 11ch IEEE802 11n Frequency 2 4GHz Transmission OFDM system Transmission Max 300Mbps speed Channel 1 11ch Authentication method Open System Shard Key WPA WPA2 Encryption mode None WEP 64bit 128bit TKIP AES When running in IEEE 802 11n only AES is supported Antenna Non directional antenna x 2 Printer interface eKUIO 5 0V Operating system Windows 2000 32bit XP 32bit 64bit Vista 32bit 64 bit 7 32bit
123. IS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1 10 11 12 Software shall mean the digitally encoded machine readable scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software You agree to accept a non exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights styles and versions of letters numerals characters and symbols Typefaces solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging Under
124. J 0 X ae C C Enter numbers and symbols Clear Key C Clear Clears entered numbers and characters Document Box Key e Document Box C e Press this key when using Document Box For details refer to Document Box on page 5 1 4 5 Operation Panel Left Select Key Right Select Key c5 co These keys only function when the respective key tabs are shown in the message display Pressing the key executes the function shown in the message display Pressing the key executes the function shown in the message display E g When the menu shown below is displayed pressing Left Select Yes prints the file selected Pressing Right Select No stops printing and returns to the menu for the previous step Print Are you sure Yes No These keys only function when the paper jam message has appeared on the message display A help message will then appear to facilitate jam clearing in the location 4 6 Operation Panel Using the Menu Selection System Menu Selection System This section explains how to use the menu selection system Menu on the operation panel allows you to use the menu to configure the printer settings to your specific needs Settings can be made when Ready to print Please wait or Processing is indicated on the printer message display Note Settings that are received from application softwar
125. Key Preshared Key settings 4 69 Note WEP Key is displayed when Netwk Authentic J Network Authentication setting on page 4 67 is set to Open or Shared Preshared Key is displayed when Netwk Authentic Network Authentication setting on page 4 67 is set to WPA PSK Or WPA2 PSK In the Encryption menu press A or V to select Data Encryption Press OK The Data Encryption screen appears Note The encryption methods that can be selected vary ss depending on the authentication method set in Netwk Authentic Network Authentication setting on page 4 67 Disable or WEP can be selected when Open or Shared is set TKIP AES Or Auto can be selected when WPA PSK is set AES can be selected when WPA2 PSK is set Press A or V to select the desired encryption method Press OK The Encryption menu reappears In the Encryption menu press A or V to select WEP Key Press OK The WEP Key screen appears Press Edit Right Select The WEP Key entry screen appears Enter the WEP Key using the numeric keys Note Up to 26 characters can be entered For details on EJ entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Press OK The Encryption menu reappears 4 68 Operation Panel Preshared Key Preshared Key settings This registers the Preshared Key 1 Inthe Encryption menu press A or V to select Preshared Key n P
126. Note Repeat steps 9 to 12 to set Energy Saver mode for a amp different function 4 89 Operation Panel Sleep Timer Sleep timer timeout time You can adjust the length of time the printer waits before entering Auto Sleep in the absence of data The printer reverts to normal operation mode when the printer receives a print job OK is pressed or one of the exterior covers is opened The default time is 1 minute 1 240 BA min Sleep Timer Sma OK 1 Inthe Timer Setting menu press A or V to select Sleep Timer 2 Press OK The Sleep Timer screen appears 2 Use the numeric keys or A or V to set the sleep time 4 Press OK The sleep time setting is stored and the Timer Setting menu reappears Power Off Rule Power Off Rule setting The Power Off Rule is used to stop the power from automatically turning off when the machine is in certain states or certain settings are in effect Rules that can be set and their initial settings are as follows Item Default Value FS 2100D For EU countriest Other than EU FS 2100DN FS 4100DN FS 4200DN FS 4300DN countries Network Network interface setting Off USB Cable USB interface setting On Off Off USB Host USB memory slot setting On Off Off RAM Disk RAM Disk Mode setting Off Off Off NIC Option Network interface kit NIC setting Off Off Off Parallel I F Parallel interface setting On Off Off
127. Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login User Name is Admin For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 pa 5 Press A or V to select the Login Password entry field Login User Name Admin Login Password Login 4 94 Operation Panel om Login Password Text Login User Name 7 Admin Login Password Login TonerAlert Level D off On TonerAlert Level Exit Off On D o Off 02 On TonerAlert Level D off On TonerAlert Level Exit TonerAlert Level D 5 100 EN 11 12 13 14 15 16 Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK The login screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login Password is Admin For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Pressing Login Right Select If the entered Login User Name and Login Password are correct the TonerAlert Level menu screen appears Press A or V to select Of On Press OK The Off On screen appears Press A or V to select whether Toner Alert Level is enabled Press OK The TonerAlert Level screen appears Press A or V to select TonerAlert Level Press OK The TonerAler
128. OK The RAM Disk Setting menu screen appears RAM Disk Setting f8 RAM Disk Mode RAM Disk Size Exit Operation Panel RAM Disk Mode Setting the RAM disk Selecting On in this setting enables the RAM disk 1 Inthe RAM Disk Setting menu press A or V to select RAM Disk Mode 2 Press OK The RAM Disk Mode screen appears RAM Disk Mode lt 0 Off fearon TT 3 Press A or V to select whether the RAM disk is enabled 4 Press OK The RAM disk setting is set and the RAM Disk Setting menu reappears RAM Disk Size RAM disk size setting Use this procedure to set the amount of memory used for the RAM disk 1 Inthe RAM Disk Setting menu press A or V to select RAM Disk Size 7 2 Press OK The RAM Disk Size screen appears RAM Disk Size lt 0 1 16 MB 3 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the amount of memory to be used as a RAM disk The maximum amount of memory that can be set varies depending on the total amount of memory in the printer 4 Press OK The amount of memory used as a RAM disk is stored and the RAM Disk Setting menu reappears When you have completed the setting exit the menu and restart the printer The selected setting is valid after the printer starts up again Format SSD Formatting the SSD When an optional SSD HD 6 is inserted into the printer for the first time it must be formatted before use This me
129. OR KYOCERA FS 2100D FS 2100DN FS 4100DN FS 4200DN FS 4300DN OPERATION GUIDE Ecoss This Operation Guide is for models FS 2100D FS 2100DN FS 4100DN FS 4200DN and FS 4300DN This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly perform routine maintenance and take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary so that you can always use the machine in good condition We recommend the use of our own brand supplies We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine A label shown in the illustration assures that the supplies are our own brand Drm TA ieocena Qi pcena ees Ng Included Guides The following guides are supplied with the machine Refer to them as necessary Quick Installation Guide Describes the procedures for installation of the machine Safety Guide Provides safety and cautionary information for the installation and use of the machine Be sure to read this guide before using the machine Safety Guide FS 2100D FS 2100DN FS 4100DN FS 4200DN FS 4300DN Describes the machine installation space cautionary space and other information Be sure to read this guide before using the machine Product Library disc Operation Guide This Guide Describes how to load paper basic print operations and troubleshooting Command Center RX User Guide Describes how to access the machine from a
130. OUN eu eon eee KNANG heen eee RS S 4 83 SOCUMLY ayien Saat Sikes Scene we dpe be ees 4 96 NE BI0GK os es sete eine eo eect a euet Ege Yah er ello Se n 4 103 WI c CL 4 97 Service Setting cce tme 4 128 Specifications A 23 SSDs aly ton vie dav bas dac iub Er etnies A 10 Glossary 3 FORMAL oin bar TR RUNE EU avast creek Ana NG 4 82 Status Menu 000000 cee ee 6 1 N elo o epe TTL 6 4 JOD Status 5 zz uu d yt SUE ea OU PIN NAG 6 2 USB Keyboard lise 6 5 Wireless Network lessen 6 5 Stat s Page edes ele rer ede diei 4 12 T Thick Paper en arre ERE FERAS EE A 21 ThinPrint Option A 12 TIFF JPEG Size oo 00 mah uk nm 4 52 Timer Setting a awa nG ee eee eee oe BLUE NANG 4 86 Auto error clear 0000 cece eee cee eee 4 91 Auto Panel Reset 00 cee eee eee 4 87 Error Clear Timer 00000e cece cence 4 92 Form Feed Timeout eee eee 4 92 Panel Reset Timer cee ee eeeee 4 88 Power Off Rule 0000 e cece eee eee 4 90 Power Off Timer eee eee eee 4 91 Sleep Level o esu dis ai aai ei a ia ea i a a iaa 4 88 Sleep Timer 2 ses ec eee PG lio cR ves ee ees 4 90 Toner Alert Level 000000 0 cee eee eee 4 94 Toner Container s es cece eee 1 3 Toner Container Replacement 7 2 TonerKits an nG GA KA KARGA KS oo DNAn vem des 7 2 TOP COVCR AA 1 3 Top Tray coetui MADE NADA Be ie ees 1 2 Transparency zi mu pa exu ahah Pr E A 18 Tr
131. P network Bonjour because an industry standard IP protocol is used allows devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353 If a firewall is enabled the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets If Bonjour does not run stably check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour 1 Inthe IPv4 Setting menu press A or V to select Bonjour 2 Press OK The Bonjour screen appears Bonjour Sma OK oj Off wa 3 Press A or V to select whether automatic detection is enabled 4 Press OK The automatic detection setting is set and the IPv4 Setting menu reappears IPv6 Setting TCP IP IPv6 settings This selects the settings for TCP IP IPv6 TCP IP IPv6 is based on the current Internet protocol TCP IP IPv4 IPv6 is the next generation Internet protocol and expands the available address space which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4 while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data tra
132. Press or V to select whether automatic error recovery is enabled 4 Press OK The automatic error recovery setting is set and the Timer Setting menu reappears Err Clear Timer Setting the error clear time If Auto Err Clear is setto On and a non fatal error an error that allows printing to continue occurs this setting specifies the time until the error is recovered and printing resumes The default setting is 30 seconds 1 Inthe Timer Setting menu press A or V toselectErr Clear Timer 2 Press OK The Err Clear Timer screen appears Err Clear Timer Ll 5 495 MEM sec 3 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the recovery time 4 Press OK The recovery time setting is stored and the Timer Setting menu reappears FormFeed TimeOut Automatic form feed timeout setting Receiving print data from the computer the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signalling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed When the preset timeout passes the machine automatically prints paper The default setting is 30 seconds 1 Inthe Timer Setting menu press A or V to select FormFeed TimeOut 4 92 Operation Panel 2 Press OK The FormFeed TimeOut screen appears FormFeed TimeOut gt 5 495 EIU sec 3 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the form feed timeout delay 4 Press OK The form feed timeout setting is stored
133. Press A or V to select Delete and press OK A confirmation message is appears Press Yes Left Select The message Completed appears and the printer deletes the selected job Pressing No Right Select returns to the file list screen Private Stored Printing a Private Print Stored Job In private printing you can specify that a job is not printed until you release the job from the operation panel When sending the job from the application software specify a 4 digit access code in the printer driver The job is released for printing by entering the access code on the operation panel ensuring confidentiality of the print job 5 28 Document Box In the stored job mode access codes are not mandatory but can be set on the printer driver if printing with PIN security is required Then the access code must be entered on the operation panel to print a stored job Print data will be stored in the SSD SD SDHC memory card or RAM disk after printing Note Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide for the driver settings The following operations are possible Printing a Private Stored Job 5 29 Printa File 5 29 Deleting a Private Stored Job 5 30 Delete a File 5 31 Printing a Private Stored Job Private Stored Dn 2 User02 2g User03 2 User01 pad OK Data01 doc 12031384 3Data02 doc 12031344 Select Print a File Print the file s selected in the Job
134. RE Lana SERIE L GB A KINAIN NGA IK BAR GAND ASINGAN ME BER 1 3 Components at the Rear of the Printer aa GANANG a xa x SA TEKA NA SES RHE CR anne 1 4 Operation Panal e PR 1 5 2 Preparation before Use Changing Network Interface Parameters esseeeseeeeeeeeese eene nennen nnn nin iav nin in nnne nina nn nnn nn nnn 2 2 Printing a Status Pagg n a eee rentas ien ridi ein ctr NINE GINA 2 6 installing Software 2 7 Status MONON 2 13 Uninstalling Software Windows PG i cc0 cccscccscscccccssessecccestsseectetssscecsssessseccessessenatestesseccesiesseauessascencaeteane 2 16 Command Center RX M 2 17 Power On Off ciiin E X REX RR Y XR REB NX RR ARP B RR RR RR RR cuR 2 20 Energy Saver Function sisanne nina sadi Dua AGING RANNIE DARING 2 21 Loading Paper 22 iiir eiiiee reach ioco R RR RRRRI SNR E RRRRD SERE chastened KRRRRDDRRR R RRRRD IRR RR GARDER GRAE 2 22 3 Printing Printing from Applications ns BAGGAGE NEAR 3 2 Canceling a PrintingdoD aaa NAA AN NS AGANG AA 3 2 Printer driver print setings Serena AABANGAN NBA NN ALIAGA 3 3 Registering a PAGE size EU 3 4 Printer Driver Rep mme 3 5 Changing the default printer driver settings Windows 7 eene 3 5 txdbuiiemi lppui t
135. Restrict and then press OK The Print Restrict screen appears Off Counter Limit Reject Usage Press A or V to select a setting and then press OK When the setting has been completed the Detail Edit menu screen appears 10 when counter Limit is set for Print Restrict in step 9 set 11 the limit on the total number of pages that can be printed using this account Press A or V to select Counter Limit and then press OK The Counter Limit menu screen appears IMPORTANT counter Limit is displayed when Counter Limit is set for Print Restrict Use the numeric keys or A or V to enter the limit you want to set for this account After you have entered the limit on the number of pages press OK The setting is stored and the Detail Edit menu reappears 4 125 Operation Panel Delete Deleting registered accounts You can use this procedure to delete a registered account ID 1 Inthe Job Account Set menu press A or V to select Account List fa 2 Press OK The Account List menu appears showing a list of Account List lt m the registered accounts in ascending order 21228 200122 803485739 Add 3 Press A or V to select the ID of the account to be deleted 4 Press OK A list of selection options appears 221228 paid OK Hon i ii Detail Edit Delete Exit 5 Press or V to select Delete and then press OK A confirmation Delete Screen appears
136. Right Select to cancel this operation and continue printing When you cancel a job Canceling appears on the message display and printing stops after the page currently printing has been fed output Printing Printer driver print settings screen The printer driver print settings screen allows you to configure a variety of print related settings For more information refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on the Product Library disc ENT Printing Preferences Orientation Collate Printonboth Multiple pages EcoPrint sides per sheet Edit Quick Print Profiles 7 Factory Default Z KYOCERA ES Canal No Description 1 Quick Print Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions Each time you click an icon it changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings 5 Printing Preferences Eg Quick Print Basic Layout Imaging Publishing Job Advanced Eco Orientation Collate Print on both Multiple pages EcoPrint sides per sheet Basic This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used You can use it to configure the paper size media type destination and duplex Layout This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts including booklet printing combine mode poster printing and scaling Imaging This tab lets you configure settings relat
137. Right clicking the Status Monitor icon allows you to set the options below Show Hide the status monitor Displays or hides the Status Monitor icon Command Center RX If the printer is connected to a TCP IP network and has its own IP address use a web browser to access the Command Center RX to modify or confirm the network settings For more information refer to the Command Center RX User Guide Always on top Positions the Status Monitor in front of other active windows Opacity Adjusts the Status Monitor to let a variable amount of background to show through the image Select a percentage between 20 to 100 Enlarge window Doubles the size of the Status Monitor window Notification Specify the Notification setting for the Status Monitor For details refer to Notification Settings on page 2 15 www kyoceradocumentsolutions com Accesses the KYOCERA Document Solutions global website Exit Exits the Status Monitor 2 14 Preparation before Use Notification Settings Use the Notification option to set up the Status Monitor The Notification tab contains the following items IMPORTANT To confirm the settings on the Notification tab the computer requires the sound capabilities such as a sound card and speaker r Preference m Notification viEnables Event Available events Events Sound file Lover open Paper jam Add paper Sleep Add toner Toner low Not connected Printing complete
138. SD SDHC memory card or SSD In this menu you can also set the type and pitch for Courier and Letter Gothic The options available in Font menu are as follows Selecting Regular or Dark Courier Letter Gothic 4 46 Changing the Default Font Size 4 46 Character Pitch 4 47 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Font Press OK The Font menu screen appears Font Sma OK Font ID Courier Exit 3 Press or V to select Font Type n 4 Press OK The Font Type screen appears Font Type lt 0 014Internal 2 Option o To select a font built in the printer press A or V to select Internal F 6 Press OK Select the font type and the Font menu reappears Font o gt Font Type Font ID Courier 7 Press A or V to select Font ID Hn 8 Press OK The Font ID entry screen appears Font ID pag Ok 9 Press A or V to select the number of the desired font Note It is possible to check the numbers of the built in fonts SJ by outputting a Font List For details refer to Font List Printing a list of the printer s fonts on page 4 14 For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 4 45 Operation Panel To select optional fonts other than those built in select Option in step 5 You can perform this operation only when optional fonts are installed in the printer The letter before t
139. ThinPrint menu ThinPrint Uu reappears OFF On When Thin Print is set to On the settings for Thin Print over SSL ThinPrintOverSSL are displayed so continue on and set these Exit N Press A or V to select ThinPrintOverSSL R 8 Press OK The ThinPrintOverSSL screen appears ThinPrintOverSSL D 0 off 9 Press A or V to select whether Thin Print over SSL is enabled 10 Press OK The Thin Print is set and the ThinPrint menu reappears LAN Interface LAN Interface setting Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used The default setting is Auto 1 Inthe Network Security menu press A or V to select LAN Interface lone 2 0605 Na acme 2 Press OK The LAN Interface screen appears LAN Interface Smid OK fo Auto OOOO The available LAN Interfaces are as follows 10Base Half DUEB 10Base Ful l 10Base Half 10Base Full 100Base Half 100Base Full 1000Base T 3 Press A or V to select the desired LAN Interface 4 Press OK The LAN Interface is set and the Network Security menu reappears I F Block Set External interface block setting You can use this to block and thereby protect the interface The options available in I F Block Set are as follows USB Host USB Port setting 4 104 USB Device USB interface setting 4 104 Option I F Optional network interface setting 4 104 Parallel I F Parallel interface
140. a Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows 7 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S A and or other countries PCLis a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Adobe Acrobat Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell Inc BMis a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation AppleTalk Bonjour Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc Helvetica Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH ITC Avant Garde Gothic ITC Bookman ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation UFST MicroType fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc are installed in this machine All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies The designations and will not be used in this Operation Guide License Agreements GPL LGPL This product contains GPL http www gnu org licenses gpl html and or LGPL http www gnu org licenses Igpl html Software as part of its fi
141. account management window appears Click Yes The installation program launches f Note If the Product Library does not launch automatically SV open the Product Library disc window in Windows Explorer and double click Setup exe Click View License Agreement and read the License Agreement Click Accept Click Install software The software install wizard starts up From this point the procedure differs depending on your version of Windows and your connection method Proceed to the correct procedure for your connection type Express Mode Custom Mode Express Mode In Express Mode the installer automatically detects the printer when it is turned on Use Express Mode for standard connection methods Choose how to ratal the scftware iral the comer ded parting sofware De parting system cat be connecte Custom Mode Create a custom initalioton Utilities Petal pert system Unites orty ck yOcERS o emo 1 In the installation method selection window select Express Mode The print system detection window appears and the installer detects the connected printers If the installer does not detect a print system check that the print system is connected via USB or a network and that it is turned on Then return to the print system detection window f Note While the information shown in Windows 7 and SJ Windows Vista Windows XP installation dialog boxes differs slightly the installation procedure is the sam
142. achine offers the following features Support for up to 100 departments Account IDs up to 8 digits long from 1 to 99999999 Collective print management for the same account ID Totaling of the number of pages used for each department Specifiable limits 1 to 9 999 999 on the number of pages used The options available in the Job Account Set menu are as follows Job Accounting Job Accounting settings 4 121 Account Report Account report printing 4 122 Each Job Account Totals display by account 4 122 Account List Account List operation 4 123 Apply Limit Operation settings when limits are exceeded 4 126 Unknown ID Job Operation settings for unknown account IDs 4 127 1 Press Menu 2 Press or V to select User Job Account x 3 Press OK The Login screen appears Login User Name lal eh eee ab elitr gh Note When user login administration is set Login Password e When logged in as an administrator the log in screen is not displayed and the User Job Account menu screen is displayed The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other than an administrator Log in again as an administrator Login 4 With the Login User Name entry field selected press OK The a Login User Name m Login User Name entry screen is displayed ABC Text 5 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK The log in screen
143. ail 0006 Detail Tn Job Name 1 6 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST Detail Detail CI v ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTU VWXYZabcdefghijklmnop qrstuvwxyz1234567890 1 In the Status menu press A or V to select Job Status Press OK Job Status is displayed and a list is displayed of the job numbers and job names of the jobs currently being printed or awaiting printing Also the type of job and results are indicated for each job using icons Press A or V to select the name of the job whose details you want to view Press Detail Right Select The Detail screen appears The detailed job status covers 6 pages in all Press to view to the next page or lt to return to the previous page Pressing OK returns you to the Job Status menu If the entire name shown as the Job Name will not fit on one line pressing Detail Right Select changes to a 3 line name display Pressing OK during 3 line name display returns you to single line name display 6 3 Status Menu Job Log You can use the Job Log to check the history of jobs that have already finished printing As well as jobs printed from PCs this log shows the outcomes for jobs printed directly from USB memory and reports such as status pages It is possible to check the log of the 100 most recent jobs The information available in the Job Log is listed below Results Displayed
144. al uses the following conventions Convention Description Example Italic Typeface Used to emphasize a key word phrase or reference to additional information To replace the toner container refer to Toner Container Replacement on page 3 2 Bold Used to denote buttons on the software To start printing click OK Bracket Bold Used to denote operation panel keys Press OK to resume printing Note Used to provide additional or useful information about a function or feature Note Check with your network administrator for the network address settings Important Used to provide important information IMPORTANT Ensure paper is not folded curled or damaged Caution Indicates what must be observed to CAUTION The fuser unit inside the printer prevent injury or machine breakdown is hot Do not touch it with your hands as it and how to deal with it ME may result in burn injury Warning Used to alert users to the possibility of personal injury WARNING If you ship the printer remove and pack the developer unit in a plastic bag and ship them separately from the printer xiv 4 Machine Parts This chapter contains explanations on the following topics Components at the Front Right of the Printer cccccccccsssseseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeeseesseeneeseesesnseseeenseaes 1 2 Components at the Left of the Printer scsvasacsasssigescavancnsovseosanseiseoscosssesse
145. anada Canada Canada Canada Canada 3 0W 1 9 W 1 6W 1 6W 1 6 W European European European European European countries countries countries countries countries Power Off 0 5 W or less Power Maximum 954 W 957 W 1180 W 1185 W 1204 W Consumption U S A U S A U S A U S A U S A With options Canada Canada Canada Canada Canada 1015 W 1021 W 1256 W 1256 W 1275 W European European European European European countries countries countries countries countries During Printing 683 W 632 W 696 W 761W 866 W U S A U S A U S A U S A U S A Canada Canada Canada Canada Canada 645 W 627 W 679 W 715W 811W European European European European European countries countries countries countries countries During Standby 17 0W 19 2 W 194W 191W 18 8 W U S A U S A U S A U S A U S A Canada Canada Canada Canada Canada 15 7 W 19 9 W 20 0 W 19 6 W 19 6 W European European European European European countries countries countries countries countries Sleep Modet 5 2 W U S A 4 7 W U S A 4 9 W U S A 5 1 W U S A 4 8 W U S A Canada Canada Canada Canada Canada 5 9W 5 1 W 47W 4 6W 4 8W European European European European European countries countries countries countries countries Power Off 0 5 W or less A 25 Appendix Description Item FS 2100D FS 2100DN FS 4100DN FS 4200DN FS 4300DN Option Expanded memory Paper Expanded m
146. and expands the available address space which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4 while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission USB Universal Serial Bus An interface standard for low to middle speed serial interfaces This printer supports Hi Speed USB The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps and the maximum cable length is 5 meters 16 feet Glossary 4 Index A Administrator llle 4 116 Alternative Emulation 0 0055 4 44 Appendix tees A 1 ApplelTalk 2 nee Reel Ree ERE Glossary 1 AUTO P oe eer Gd eee brd eae dodo ELDER Glossary 1 B Bon oUr M2 ssi nade nner PE RUE ka shee be Glossary 1 Bulk Paper Feeder 02 0020 aaa ies eee A 12 Bulk paper feeder clearing paper jams 000000 e eee 8 23 BUZZOR CHE 4 79 C Canceling a Printing Job 3 2 4 4 Card Authentication Kit B aa A 12 Cassette 1 to 5 Settings eL ET 4 28 Paper Weight seces sire crece Ban Ene 4 35 Cassette Tahan hx aon ORE ROSA REUS RUE E ROGERUS 1 2 Character Entry Method 2220005 A 2 Cleaning NIMS Pec 2a End atin ite ha ine AN hase skies nde yh ad enact 7 8 Clearing paper jams bulk paper feeder aa 8 23 Duplex nit ccc eem erem ee eee 8 21 inside the printer llle 8 22 lucir 8 19 paper cassette l una eee 8
147. aper weight of the selected custom paper whether duplex printing is permitted and the registration of the name to be displayed Use the procedure below to set the custom paper weight 1 Inthe Paper Settings menu press A or V to select Media Type Set 2 Press OK The Media Type Set screen appears listing the Media Type Set em media types that can used with the printer Transparency Preprinted Exit 3 Press or V to select the custom paper CUSTOM 1 to 8 for which you want to set the paper weight 4 36 Operation Panel 4 Press OK A menu for the selected media is displayed CUSTOM 1 ping OK Paper Weight Duplex Name Entry Exit 5 Press A or V to select Paper Weight 6 Press OK The Paper Weight screen appears listing the paper Paper Weight lt 0 weights that can used with the printer Heavy 1 Normal 3 03 Normal 2 N Press A or V to select the desired paper weight 8 Press OK The paper weight is set and the Media Type Set screen reappears Use the procedure below to specify whether duplex printing is permitted with custom paper 1 Inthe Paper Settings menu press A or V to select Media Type Set 2 Press OK The Media Type Set screen appears listing the Media Type Set Vm media types that can used with the printer Transparency Preprinted Exit 3 Press A or V to select the custom paper CUSTOM 1 to 8 for wh
148. areness of corners 90 0 2 Appendix To prevent printing problems feed transparencies into the printer one sheet at a time from the MP tray Always load the transparencies vertically with the long edge towards the printer If the transparencies have rough edges on the back it may cause a paper jam Remove the rough edges reverse the sides feed the sheet from the opposite edge or flip the sheet over When unloading transparencies e g for clearing jams hold them carefully by the edges to avoid leaving fingerprints on them Labels Labels must be fed from the MP tray The basic rule for printing on adhesive labels is that the adhesive must never come into contact with any part of the machine Adhesive paper sticking to the drum or rollers will damage the machine Label paper has a structure comprising of three layers as shown in the diagram The top sheet is printed on The adhesive layer consists of pressure sensitive adhesives The carrier sheet also called the linear or mM Top sheet white backing sheet holds the labels until used Due to the complexity of its bond paper composition adhesive backed label paper is particularly likely to give Adhesive printing problems Carrier sheet Adhesive label paper must be entirely covered by its top sheet with no spaces between the individual labels Labels with spaces in between are liable to peel off causing serious paper jam problems
149. ars 3 Press or V to select On or of and then press OK The Job Account Set menu reappears 4 121 Operation Panel Account Report Account report printing This enables you to print the total number of pages for all accounts as a Job Accounting list 1 Inthe Job Account Set menu press A or V to select Account Report 2 Press OK A confirmation screen appears Print 8 Press Yes Left Select Accepted appears and the printer 5 Are KANA prints the job accounting list A t R E Mai ROS Pressing No Right Select returns to the Job Account Set menu without printing the job accounting list Yes No Each Job Account Totals display by account Displays the number of pages printed for each of the currently selected accounts This enables you to check the following numbers for printed pages Total Combine None Combine 2in1 Combine 4in1 Duplex 1side Duplex 2side Note Before carrying out this operation register the Account in the Account List Account List operation on page 4 123 1 Inthe Job Account Set menu press A or V toselect Each Job Account ot oa ee 2 Press OK The Each Job Account menu appears with the Each Job Account 0 accounts with the highest numbers listed first 8900923022 9 12345678 n 3 Press or V to select an account and then press OK The 22341736 lt m Printed Pages Counter Reset menu sc
150. atically deleted after printing PIN security No No Yes Yes if necessary Data after printing Stored Stored Deleted Stored Data at power off Deleted Deleted Deleted Stored SSD HD 6 or SD Necessary Unnecessary Unnecessary Necessary SDHC memory card RAM disk may also be used RAM disk may also be used T Jobs in excess will cause the earlier ones to be deleted Note Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide for the driver settings and print save procedures 5 24 Document Box Procedure for printing using Job Box Follow the work flow below when using Job Box Specifying the Job Box from a computer and sending the print job page 5 34 v Using the operation panel to specify a file within a Box and printing it Quick Copy page 5 25 Proof and Hold page 5 25 Private Print page 5 28 Stored Job page 5 28 Operation panel display 1 Press Document Box Either the Custom Box list screen or the ng Job Box 3 Job Box menu screen is displayed Job Box Setting Note After pressing Document Box it is possible to display Ss either the Custom Box list screen or the Job Box menu screen or to set them Refer to Def Screen Box Document Box default Exit screen setting on page 4 75 If the Custom Box list screen is displayed follow the procedure below to display the Job Box menu screen 1 Press Back 2 Press A or V to select Job Box Press OK The
151. can be conveniently changed and checked from your PC For more information refer to the B 50 IB 51 User s Manual 1 Press Menu 2 Press or V to select Optional Network E 3 Press OK The Login screen appears Login User Name EHE REESE I f Note When user login administration is set Login Password When logged in as an administrator the log in screen is not displayed and the Optional Network menu screen is displayed The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other than an administrator Log in again as an administrator Login 4 With the Login User Name entry field selected press OK The a Login User Name W Login User Name entry screen is displayed ABC Text 5 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK The log in screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login User Ss Name is Admin For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 PS 6 Press or V to selectthe Login Password entry field Login User Name Admin Login Password Login 4 62 Operation Panel Login Password ABC Text Login User Name 7 Admin Login Password Login Optional Network 0m Basic Communication Exit This selects the settings for Wireless network Wireless Network 0m Quick Setup Cust
152. cations Insert the Product Library disc supplied with the printer into the optical drive Following the procedure used to install the printer driver click Remove Software The Software Remove wizard appears Select the software package to remove Click Uninstall Z Note In Windows Vista the Remove Driver and Package amp screen appears Select Remove driver and driver package and click OK When KYOCERA Net Viewer or KYOCERA Net Direct Print is installed separate uninstallers are launched for each application Proceed with the uninstallation steps for each application as directed by the on screen instructions The uninstaller starts When the Uninstall complete screen appears click Next Select whether you restart your computer or not click Finish 2 16 Preparation before Use Command Center RX Command Center RX is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine on the web and changing the settings for security network printing and advanced networking If the E mail settings are made then it is possible to send notification by E mail when a job is completed Note To change settings in Command Center RX you must log in as an administrator of the machine The default amp factory settings are set as shown below Login User Name Admin Login Password Admin The operation procedure for accessing Command Center RX is as follows 1 Start the web browser 2 Inthe Address or Location bar en
153. col and is an IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 Internet Control Message Protocol ICMPv6 for the Internet Protocol Version 6 IPv6 Specification SD SDHC Memory Card An SD Memory Card is a removable storage media It is nonvolatile semiconductor memory where the data remains even when the power supply is cut The maximum memory capacity is 2 GB SDHC memory cards are a higher specification of SD memory cards These memory cards have bigger capacities than SD memory cards and have a guaranteed minimum transfer speed As the file system was changed to FAT32 up to a maximum of 32 GB is supported Sleep mode This mode is provided to save power It is activated when the machine is not used for a preset period of time In this mode power is reduced to the minimum The default setting can be changed SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol A protocol for E mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers SSD Solid State Drive An SSD is a media for data storage using flash memory Whereas HDD generally use magnetic discs as the storage media SDD are a storage media which use semiconductors Compared with HDD on which a head reads from the magnetic disk the merits of SSD are that they can read data at higher speeds they are resistant to vibrations and they do not require motors which mean that they consume less elect
154. crease or reduce the figures by pressing A or V Use lt and gt to move the position being entered which is shown highlighted 4 Press OK The IP address is stored and the TPv4 Setting menu reappears Subnet Mask Subnet mask setting The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0 The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of the network address The term prefix refers to something added to the beginning and in this context indicates the first section of the IP address When an IP address is written the length of the network address can indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash For example 24 in the address 133 210 2 0 24 In this way 133 210 2 0 24 denotes the IP address 133 210 2 0 with a 24 bit prefix network section 4 56 Operation Panel This new network address section originally part of the host address made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address Note When you enter the subnet mask be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off 1 inthe IPv4 Setting menu press A or V to select Subnet Mask n Press OK The Subnet Mask screen appears Subnet Mask pal OK BEA 5 0 O 3 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the subnet mask You can set any value between 000 and 255 Increase or reduce the fig
155. d Completed file s is are moved Note If the screen for entering a password is displayed then amp enter the password using the numeric keys and then press OK Refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 for details on entering characters Check File Details Details for the file that is selected with the cursor will appear 1 In the file list screen press Menu Left Select 7 2 Press A or V to select File Detail Menu o gt Search Name Box Detail Edit File Detail 3 Press OK Details for the file that is selected with the cursor Detail Un appears Pile Names 1 5 The details for the file cover 5 pages in all Press gt to view to the next ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST page or 1 to return to the previous page Detail In the File Name screen if the file name is abbreviated because it Detail wa OK cannot be displayed on one line press Detail Right Select to ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPOQRSTU change the display to three lines VWXYZ txt 5 23 Document Box Job Box IMPORTANT To use the Job Box an optional SSD HD 6 or SD SDHC memory card must be installed in the printer The RAM disk may also be used in the Proof and Hold and Private Print modes Job Box is a print function that makes the Job Retention function possible The settings are specified from the printer driver Refer to Computer settings Printer dr
156. d Others SSS S S S S S S Sound file 7 Use Text to speech Read the user specified text using Microsoft Text to Speech ima gt Browse Enables Event Notification Select to enable or disable monitoring the events in Available events Sound file A sound file can be selected if you require an audible notification Click Browse to search for the sound file Use Text to speech Select this check box to enter text you would like to hear played for events Although a sound file is unnecessary this function is applicable for Windows XP or later To use this function follow these steps 1 Select Enables Event Notification 2 Select an event to use with the text to speech and playing sound file function in Available events 3 Click Browse to notify the event by sound file Note The available file format is WAV Select Use Text to speech to hear the text entered in the Text to speech box when an event occurs 4 Click Play to confirm the sound or text is played correctly Preparation before Use Uninstalling Software Windows PC The software can be uninstalled removed using the Product Library disc supplied with the printer IMPORTANT On Macintosh computers because the printer settings are specified using a PPD PostScript Printer Description file the software cannot be uninstalled using the Product Library disc 1 2 A o Exit all active software appli
157. d The default setting is On 1 Inthe Buzzer menu screen press A or V to select Key Confirmation 2 Press OK The Key Confirmation screen appears Key Confirmation n Off L3 3 Press or V to select whether the key confirmation tone is enabled 4 Press OK The key confirmation tone setting is set and the Buzzer menu reappears Job Finish Job completed tone setting When on is selected in this setting a tone sounds when printing ends The default setting is Off 1 Inthe Buzzer menu screen press A or V to select Job Finish 2 Press OK The Job Finish screen appears Job Finish D o1 Off On 3 Press or V to select whether the printing completed tone is enabled 4 79 Operation Panel 4 Press OK The printing completed tone setting is set and the Buzzer menu reappears Ready Preparation completed tone setting When on is selected in this setting a tone sounds when print preparation has been completed The default setting is Off 1 Inthe Buzzer menu screen press A or V to select Ready 2 Press OK The Ready screen appears Ready Sma OK 3 On 3 Press A or V to select whether the preparation completed tone is enabled 4 Press OK The preparation completed tone setting is set and the Buzzer menu reappears Error Error tone setting When on is selected in this setting a tone sounds when a problem such as running out of paper o
158. d KPDL KPDL is mini driver Kyocera s implementation of the PostScript O language With this driver it is only possible to use a limited number of all the functions of the machine and the optional functions there are KYOCERA Net Viewer Utility Utility that enables the machine when connected Q to a network to be monitored KYOCERA Net Direct Simple printing of PDF documents O Print Fonts These are the screen fonts equivalent to the O printer fonts Installing the Software in Windows If you are connecting this printer to a Windows PC follow the next steps to install the printer driver The example shows you how to connect your printer to a Windows 7 Note In Windows operating systems you must be logged on with administrator rights to install the printer driver You can use either Express Mode or Custom Mode to install the software Express Mode automatically detects connected printers and installs the required software Use Custom Mode if you want to specify the printer port and select the software to be installed 1 Turnon the computer and start up Windows If the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box displays select Cancel 2 Insert the Product Library disc supplied with the printer into the optical drive of the PC In Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 R2 and 2 7 Preparation before Use Install Software www kyoceradocumentsolubons com Windows Vista the user
159. d of the device This is mandatory to make the settings effective 1 Inthe Network menu press A or V to select Restart Network n Press OK A confirmation screen appears Network gt TCP IP Settings Restart Network Exit 3 Press Yes Left Select The message Restarting Restart appears and the network is restarted 9 Are you sure Pressing No Right Select returns to the Network menu without restarting the network Yes No Operation Panel Optional Network Optional Network settings This selects the settings for the optional network interface kit IB 50 or wireless network interface kit IB 51 Note This is only displayed when a network interface kit IB 50 or wireless network interface kit IB 51 is SV installed as an option The options available in the Optional Network settings are as follows Wireless Network Wireless network settings 4 63 Basic Basic settings for the optional network interface kit 4 69 Communication Select the network interface to use 4 72 Note Check with your network administrator when selecting the network setting After all network related settings amp have been done restart the network Refer to Restart Network Restarting the optional network interface kit on page 4 72 This is mandatory to make the settings effective When the web page for IB 50 or IB 51 is used network parameters and security settings
160. d paper refer to Paper Specifications on page A 13 In addition the pigments used in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of fusing during the printing process up to 200 C or 392 F Preprinted Paper Preprinted paper should satisfy the same conditions as white bond paper refer to Paper Specifications on page A 13 The preprinted ink must be able to withstand the heat of fusing during the printing process and must not be affected by silicone oil Do not use paper with any kind of surface treatment such as the type of paper commonly used for calendars Recycled Paper Select recycled paper that meets the same specifications as the white bond paper except for whiteness refer to Paper Specifications on page A 13 Note Before purchasing recycled paper test a sample on the machine and check that the printing quality is SJ satisfactory A 21 Appendix Paper Type The printer is capable of printing under the optimum setting for the type of paper being used Setting the paper type for the paper source from the printer s operation panel will cause the printer to automatically select the paper source and print in the mode best suited to that type of paper A different paper type setting can be made for each paper source including the MP tray Not only can preset paper types be selected but it is also possible for you to define and select customized paper types Refer to Media Type Set Paper type settings on page 4 35
161. d the Print Quality menu Screen reappears 4 49 Operation Panel Page Setting Setting pagination You can use the Page Setting menu to set the number of copies the page orientation and other pagination settings The options available in Page Setting are as follows Copies Number of copies 4 50 Orientation Print orientation 4 50 LF Action Linefeed 4 51 CR Action Carriage Return 4 51 Wide A4 Wide A 4 pitch 4 51 XPS FitTo Page Adjusting the XPS file print out size 4 52 TIFF JPEG Size Adjusting the TIFF JPEG file print out size 4 52 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Page Setting x 2 Press OK The Page Setting menu screen appears Page Setting 9 OK Orientation LF Action Exit Copies Number of copies You can set the number of copies of each page to be printed 1 Inthe Page Setting menu press A or V to select Copies pa 2 Press OK The Copies screen appears Copies o gt 1 999 copies 3 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the number of copies 4 Press OK The setting is stored and the Page Setting menu reappears Orientation Print orientation You can select portrait upright or landscape sideways page orientation Portrait Orientation Landscape Orientation 1 Inthe Page Setting menu press A or V to select orientation 4 50 Operation Panel
162. done for the Box name entered Note Refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 for details on SS entering characters Setting automatic document deletion for Custom Boxes Set the time for documents stored in Custom Boxes to be automatically deleted 1 Inthe custom Box list screen press Menu Left Select The Menu lt u Menu screen appears Sort Search No File Del Time 2 Press A or V to select File Del Time i 3 Press OK The File Del Time screen appears File Del Time 9 OK Hour Min n 00 4 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to enter the hours and minutes Press A or V to increase or decrease the figures Use lt and gt to move the position being entered which is shown highlighted 5 Press OK The Menu screen reappears 5 15 Document Box File operations Printing deleting and moving files It is possible to print files stored in a Custom Box to delete them or to move them to a different Custom Box The following operations are possible Box number Box name Select a File 5 16 Select Deselect All Files 5 16 Print a File 5 17 Print a File Changes to the print settings 5 18 Delete a File 5 22 Moving files 5 22 Check File Details 5 23 1 Inthe custom Box list screen press A or V to select a Custom Box Custom Box Sma OK 40002 XYZ box 40003 Common Menu Add 2 Press OK T
163. ds of 1 gigabit per second In addition to the TCP IP and NetBEUI supported by the machine s standard network interface it also supports IPX SPX and Apple Talk so network printing becomes possible in various environments including Windows Macintosh UNIX and Netware Option Interface Slot Wireless Network Interface Kit IB 51 This is a wireless network interface kit which supports the wireless network specifications IEEE802 11n Max 300 Mbps and 11 g b With the utilities supplied settings are possible for a variety of OS and network protocols The parallel interface kit supports communications speeds up to 2 Mbps Use a parallel printer cable when this option is used ain Controller Board Appendix USB Memory USB memory is a type of simple highly portable flash memory that plugs into the USB memory slot Files stored in USB memory can be printed by plugging the USB memory into the printer and then specifying the desired file names from the operation panel The operation panel displays the names of PDF TIFF JPEG and XPS files Up to 1 000 files can be printed from USB memory Files with names consisting of up to 255 single byte alphanumeric characters can be printed Any double byte characters included in a file name appear as corrupted text in the message list Also when the file is printed an error message appears and printing fails For information on printing PDF files stored in USB memory
164. e Network connection is only on network compatible models Preparation before Use 2 Select the print system to be installed and click Next Discover Printing System Note If the Found New Hardware Wizard appears click R n SJ Cancel If a hardware installation warning message appears click Continue P ERU acca dikuoceRa ito iwa 3 You can customize the print system name in the installation settings D window This will be the name displayed in the Printer window and in Tipe nog ey pim Som pogan do ret mo ar ar ra contr anga the printer lists displayed in applications Specify whether to share the print system name or set the print system as an existing printer and A Sbi Je dun Bio pr ap ndum ao then click Next E l IMPORTANT Step 3 only appears if the print system is aone connected via a network It does not appear if the print system is connected via a USB tfl KuoctRa r m Network connection is only on network compatible models 4 A window appears in which you can check the settings Check the settings carefully and then click Install Note If the Windows security window appears click Install Ss this driver software anyway 5 Amessage appears saying that the printer has been installed successfully Click Finish to exit the printer installation wizard and return the Product Library disc main menu If the device setup dialog box appears after you click Finish you can specify the settings for item
165. e 5 20 JobFinish Notice Settings for notification when jobs are finished 5 20 Del after Print Delete data after printing setting 5 21 Document Box Duplex Setting the duplex printing Set duplex printing For details refer to Duplex Setting the duplex printing on page 4 41 1 Inthe Copies menu or the Paper Selection menu press Function pang OK Function Right Select The Function menu appears EcoPrint File Name Entry 2 Press A or V to select Duplex 3 Press OK The Duplex screen appears showing the list of available Duplex lt 0 duplex printing modes Moff 2 Bind Long Edge Bind Short Edge 4 Press or V to select the desired duplex printing mode The message display toggles through the following Off default Bind Long Edge Bind Short Edge Selecting of f disables duplex printing 5 Press OK The duplex printing mode is set and the Funct ion menu reappears EcoPrint Selecting the EcoPrint mode Set EcoPrint mode For details refer to EcoPrint Selecting the EcoPrint mode on page 4 48 1 Inthe Copies menu or the Paper Selection menu press Function pai OK Function Right Select The Function menu appears EcoPrint File Name Entry 2 Press A or V to select EcoPrint 3 Press OK The EcoPrint screen appears EcoPrint D Moff 3 On I Press A or V to select the EcoPrint mode
166. e 140 Press OK The host name is registered and the Netwk Auth Set menu reappears Ext has been set as the Server Type Server type selection on page 4 In the Netwk Auth Set menu press A or V to select Port Press OK The Port screen appears 4 112 Operation Panel 3 Enter the port number using the numeric keys Note If the port number is registered as a blank field the Ss default port number will be enabled 4 Press OK The port number is registered and the Netwk Auth Set menu reappears Domain Name Entering of Domain Name Enter the domain name for the authentication server Note This setting is only displayed when NTLM or Kerberos has been set as the Server Type Server type SV selection on page 4 112 1 Inthe Netwk Auth Set menu press A or V to select Domain Name 2 Press OK The Domain Name screen appears Domain Name D Text 3 Enter the domain name using the numeric keys Note Up to 256 characters can be entered For details on amp entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 4 Press OK The domain name is registered and the Netwk Auth Set menu reappears NW User Property Obtain the network user property This setting is to acquire user information from the LDAP server Note This setting is only displayed when Netwk Authentic has been set as the Login Type Enabling of User SV Login Administration on page
167. e Custom Box list screen 1 Press Back 2 Press A or V toselect Custom Box 3 Press OK The Custom Box list screen appears The options available in Custom Box are as follows Custom Box operation Box creation editing and deletion 5 5 File operations Printing deleting and moving files 5 16 Document Box Custom Box operation Box creation editing and deletion It is possible to create Custom Boxes and change Box settings The following operations are possible Custom Box creation 5 5 Editing and Deleting Custom Boxes 5 12 Sorting the Custom Box list 5 13 Searching Custom Boxes 5 14 Setting automatic document deletion for Custom Boxes 5 15 Note The creation and setting of Custom Boxes is also possible from Command Center RX For more information y refer to the Command Center RX User Guide Custom Box creation Create a Custom Box Enter the Box Name and Box Number then it is possible to continue on and set the details of the Box Note When user login administration is enabled log in as a user with administrator authority j 1 Inthe custom Box list screen press Add Right Select The Box Name Entry m Box Name Entry Screen appears Text 2 Enter the Box Name using the numeric keys Note Up to 32 characters can be entered For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 3 Press OK The Box Numbe
168. e Login User Name entry field selected press OK The a Login User Name W Login User Name entry screen is displayed ABC Text 5 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK The log in screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login User SV Name is Admin For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 x 6 Press or V to selectthe Login Password entry field Login User Name Admin Login Password Login 4 96 Operation Panel Login Password ABC Text Login User Name 7 Admin Login Password Login Security Dn Network Securit F Block Set Security Level Exit 7 Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed 8 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK The log in screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login Password is Admin For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 9 Pressing Login Right Select If the entered Login User Name and Login Password are correct the Security menu screen appears Network Security Network security setting Use this procedure to specify the security settings for each of the network protocols used IMPORTANT Check with your network administrator when selecting network sett
169. e Setting for Maintenance IMPORTANT Service Setting is primarily a menu used by service personnel for maintenance work Item Description Value Service Status The service status page contains printer settings information that is more Yes No detailed than the standard status page and is therefore mostly for service purposes However there is a great deal of information on the service status page that may be useful to you Network Status The network status page contains detailed information on the network settings Yes No This is primarily used for maintenance by service personnel but it contains information that may also be useful to you Note The Network Status menu is only displayed on network compatible models 4 128 Operation Panel Item Description Value Op Netwk Status The option network status page contains detailed information on the network settings This is primarily used for maintenance by service personnel but it contains information that may also be useful to you Note The Op Netwk Status menu is only displayed when the optional network interface kit IB 50 or wireless network interface kit IB 51 is installed Yes No Test Page The test page is printed to check the effectiveness of printer adjustments This is primarily used for maintenance by service personnel but it contains information that may also be useful to you Yes No Maintenance New Developer Thi
170. e TCP IP Pv4 Setting TCP IP IPv4 settings Pv6 Setting TCP IP IPv6 settings 1 Inthe Basic menu press A or V to select TCP IP Settings 4 69 Operation Panel 2 Press OK The TCP IP Settings menu screen appears TCP IP Settings lt m TCP IP IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Exit TCP IP Enable Disable TCP IP This specified whether TCP IP is used The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network settings For details refer to TCP IP Enable Disable TCP IP on page 4 54 IPv4 Setting TCP IP IPv4 settings This selects the settings for TCP IP IPv4 The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network settings For details refer to Pv4 Setting TCP IP IPv4 settings on page 4 55 IPv6 Setting TCP IP IPv6 settings This selects the settings for TCP IP IPv6 The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network settings For details refer to Pv6 Setting TCP IP IPv6 settings on page 4 58 Netware NetWare setting NetWare is a PC based network operating system specifically for servers NetWare is a client server system that operates by installing the NetWare OS on the server and dedicated client modules NetWare clients on the client machines running MS DOS OS 2 Windows etc The basic network layer protocol used is NetWare s own IPX Internetwork Packet eXchange SPX Sequenced Packet eXchange but the system also supports TCP IP The feat
171. e and the printer driver will take priority over settings made SJ in the operation panel Entering the Mode Selection Menu Press Menu when Ready to print is indicated on the printer message display The mode selection menu is displayed Ready to print PELT VS A4 Status Toner Mode Selection Menu Scroll line ama The directions of usable Menu Ny arrow keys are shown on PAPA Report Print the screen displayed An asterisk is displayed to the left of the currently USB Memory Vv selected setting Counter EXER Press Press Press lt I gt Scroll page key key key Menu m Paper Settings Dn Mellia Type Rud OK pa Paper Settings ES MP Tray Set rib ed Plain Print Settings iV Cassette 1 Set Vv Preprinted id Network Media Type Set Bond Exit JI Exit lt D AB m IB m a LI q Sub menu SSS Note Only when USB memory is installed USB Memory is displayed SI Network is only displayed on network compatible models Operation Panel Selecting a Menu The mode selection menu is hierarchical Press A V lt or gt to display the desired menu If lt gt appears in the top right of the screen you can use the A and Menu 7 V to scroll up and down through the menu options one line at a time Report Print and t
172. e cap to the old waste toner box after removing the box from the printer Old Waste Toner Box To prevent toner from spilling put the old waste toner box in the plastic bag contained in the toner kit and discard it later according to the local code or regulations for waste disposal Plastic Bag 7 6 Maintenance 5 Open the cap of the new waste toner box New Waste Toner Box 6 Insert the new waste toner box as shown in the figure When the box is set correctly it will snap into place 7 Make sure that the waste toner box is correctly inserted and close the left cover After replacing the toner containers and the waste toner box clean the paper transfer unit For instructions refer to Cleaning the Printer on page 7 8 Maintenance Cleaning the Printer To avoid print quality problems the interior of the printer must be cleaned with every toner container replacement IMPORTANT Before cleaning the printer remove the paper on the MP tray 1 Open the top cover and front cover 2 Pull the developer unit together with the toner container 3 Use a lint free cloth to clean dust and dirt away from the registration roller metal 4 Insert the developer unit together with the toner container back into the machine 5 Close the front cover and top cover 7 8 Maintenance Open the left cover Use a lint free cloth to clean dust and dirt away from the vents Close the left cover Use
173. e damaged During printing some ozone is released but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one s health If however the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when printing an extremely large number of copies the smell may become unpleasant To maintain the appropriate environment for print work it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated Cautions when Handling Consumables Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner Dangerous sparks may cause burns O Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner avoid inhalation and ingestion as well as contact with your eyes and skin O If you do happen to inhale toner move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water If coughing develops contact a physician If you do happen to ingest toner rinse your mouth out with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach If necessary contact a physician If you do happen to get toner in your eyes flush them thoroughly with water If there is any remaining tenderness contact a physician e If toner does happen to get on your skin wash with soap and water Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner S Other precautions Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative The c
174. e operation panel keys are used to configure the printer operation Note that certain keys have a secondary function Cancel Key Q CD This key is used to Cancel a printing job Stop the alarm sound Canceling a Printing Job 1 While the printer displays Processing press Cancel The Job Cancel List appears showing the list of current print jobs 2 Press A or V to display the desired job and then press OK When the Job will be canceled Are you sure message appears press Yes Left Select to cancel the job or No Right Select to cancel this operation and continue printing When you cancel a job Canceling appears on the message display and printing stops after the page currently printing has been fed output Logout Key e If user control is set then please log out by pressing Logout after operations are completed Menu Key Menu MENU lets you enter the menu system to change the setup and printing environment of the printer Back Key Back Cancels the menu setting currently displayed and returns to the menu for the previous step Operation Panel Arrow Keys A lt gt V The four arrow keys are used in the menu system to access an item or enter numeric values OK Key Me Finalize settings of numeric values and other selections Numeric Keys 1 2 ABC 3 DEF d Mg 4 GHI 5 JKL 6 mno Cy C Co 7 pars 8TUV 9 wxyz C3 C9 C
175. e printer automatically restarts and then initialization starts System Initialization will start If you do not wish to initialize press No Right Select The ssp Are you sure Initializ menu reappears Yes No 4 107 Operation Panel 4 When the initialization is finished Task is completed is Task is completed displayed Turn the power switch off and then on Turn the main power switch off and on DataSanitization Sanitizing the stored data This is to completely delete the address information registered on the machine and the stored image data IMPORTANT To complete this process requires about 30 minutes when an optional SSD HD 6 is installed and a few minutes when an SSD HD 6 is not installed You can only performing this operation by logging in with machine administrator privileges It is not possible to cancel the process once it has started Remove the USB cable and network cable etc before performing this operation Do not turn off the power supply whilst the deletion is ongoing If the power switch off during the deletion then the deletion will automatically be performed when the power is switched back on but a complete operation cannot be guaranteed The data deleted is as listed below Job settings Machine settings Network settings Certificates User settings user list document boxes Machine administration job logs job accountin
176. e the position being entered which is shown highlighted 18 Press OK The IP address is stored and the IPv4 Setting menu reappears When DHCP is set to Off enter the Subnet Mask manually Bonjour Exit Subnet Mask U MMM o o o IPv4 Setting Dn Subnet Mask Default Gateway 19 Press A or V to select Subnet Mask 20 Press OK The Subnet Mask screen appears 21 Use the numeric keys or A or V to set the subnet mask You can set any value between 000 and 255 The method for entering is the same as for the IP Address 22 Press OK The subnet mask setting is stored and the IPv4 Setting menu reappears 2 5 Preparation before Use Entering the Default Gateway When DHCP is set to Off enter the Default Gateway manually 23 Press A or V to select Default Gateway 24 Press OK The Default Gateway screen appears Default Gateway OD ERN o o o 25 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the default gateway You can set any value between 000 and 255 The method for entering is the same as for the IP Address 26 Press OK The default gateway is stored and the IPv4 Setting menu reappears This completes the network settings Press Menu and end the mode selection menu Z Note When the network settings have been changed restart Ss the network card of the device This is mandatory to make the settings effective For details ref
177. e used for a prolonged period amp N protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag 9 Select the media type plain recycled etc loaded in the cassette Refer to Media Type Setting the cassette paper type on page 4 29 2 24 Preparation before Use Loading Paper into the MP Multi Purpose Tray The multi purpose tray will hold up to 100 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A4 to A6 and Hagaki and from Legal to Statement 216 x 340 mm Envelope Monarch Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Executive Envelope 9 Envelope 6 ISO B5 Oufuku Hagaki Oficio Il 16K Folio Youkei 2 Youkei 4 and Custom Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper IMPORTANT When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled or colored paper always specify the media type setting Refer to Media Type Paper type setting for the MP tray on page 4 27 If you are using a paper weight of 106 g m or more set the media type to Thick The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m 100 sheets Hagaki 1 sheet OHP film 1 sheet Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Monarch Youkei 4 Youkei 2 5 sheets Folio 20 sheets Thick paper 5 sheets Note When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick pape
178. e with it Optional Feeder Paper Feeders Optional Disk Location Kind Kyocera FS 43000N PDC Mates Idle Default Default Printer ss s Default Paper Size in Page Setup A4 a a Click the lock to prevent further changes 11 Select the installed printer driver and click Add 12 Select the options available for the printer and click Continue 13 The selected printer is added This completes the printer setup procedure 2 12 Preparation before Use Status Monitor The Status Monitor monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing reporting function It also allows you to specify and modify settings for printers not included in the KX driver The Status Monitor is installed automatically during KX driver installation Accessing the Status Monitor Use either of the methods listed below to launch the Status Monitor Launch when printing starts When you specify a printer and start a print job one Status Monitor is launched for each printer name If Status Monitor startup is requested from multiple printers Status Monitors are launched for each printer that issues the request Launch from the KX driver properties Click the Status Monitor button in the Advanced tab Then click Open Status Monitor button in the Status Monitor dialog box to launch the Status Monitor Exiting the Status Monitor Use either of the methods listed below to exit the Status Monitor Exit manually Righ
179. e with the related points Symbols The A symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol A General warning A Warning of high temperature The amp symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol O Warning of prohibited action Q Disassembly prohibited The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol o Alert of required action Remove the power plug from the outlet eb Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing fee required Note An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases SJ because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function Contents Legal and Safety Information 1 Machine Parts Components at the Front Right of the Printer essen eene nennen nennen nennt innen 1 2 Components at the Left of the Printer 0 aa BABANGGA NAAN NE iiinn baiarai 1 2 Internal Components 5 crac senti berba llle RE
180. ect Device Common Device Common Dn Def Screen Box Date Setting Exit available options Language Selecting the message language You can select the language of the message display by following the procedure given below You can optionally download messages in other languages Contact your service technician for information 1 Inthe Device Common menu press A or V to select Language Language um languages g jj Deutsch Fran ais The available languages are as follows English Deutsch Fran ais Espa ol Italiano Nederlands Pycckn Portugu s 4 74 Operation Panel 3 Press OK The Device Common menu appears showing a list of 2 Press OK The Language screen appears showing the list of Operation Panel o Custom BOX 62 Job BOX Def Screen Box D The optional languages are as follows Optional language Message display Turkish T rkce Greek EAAnviK Polish Polski Czech Cesky Hungarian Magyar Finnish Suomi Hebrew nnay Arabic ent Swedish Svenska Danish Dansk Norwegian Norsk Romanian Rom n Catalan Catal If you are using one of the optional languages it is displayed in place of Portugu s 3 Press or V to select the desired language 4 Press OK The language is set and the Device Common menu 1 2 reappears
181. ed by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 Ifyou include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com TH
182. ed to the quality and grayscale adjustment of the print results Publishing This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP film Job This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine Regularly used documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later Since saved documents can be printed directly from the machine this function is also convenient when you wish to print a document that you don t want others to see Advanced This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data 2 Profiles Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile Saved profiles can be recalled at any time so it is a convenient practice to save frequently used settings Printing Registering a page size When cardstock or an envelope is loaded in the Multi Purpose Tray set the paper size and type and then register the paper size on the Basic tab of the print settings screen in the printer driver Once registered the paper size can be selected from the Page Size menu Kyocera FS 4300DN KX Printing Preferences EHI 2 skins Ca layout Imaging Publishing Job Advanced papet Page Sizes 2 ees 8 Print size Media type e a4 10096 Unspecified Select page size 210 x 297 mm Source Destination pate c Auto source selection Printer default Fayetone pt 3 216 x340
183. eee A 21 Envelopes seed easiest nak Pale de A 20 Guidelines haka etn ri tbe s A 15 Labels ih seceded rEREO ER ERR aoe ha Peed a PA E EE A 19 Loading Envelopes 0 0 00 e eee eee eae 2 27 Loading Paper into the Cassette 2 22 Loading Paper into the MP Tray 2 25 Media Type 2 4 27 4 33 4 34 4 35 Minimum and Maximum Paper Sizes A 14 Other Paper Properties lesen A 17 Paper Availability 00000 e eae A 13 Paper Sizes 4 26 4 28 4 30 A 15 Paper ThicknesS 00000 eee eee eee eae 4 35 aieo f P E A 20 Preprinted Paper 0 0 00 ccc eee eee A 21 Recycled Paper 0 000 eee eee eens A 21 Resets Customized settings 4 38 Special Paper sii abl kab ha Kan Eon kn A 18 Thick Paper 20 sce ec ee cea lic iaa te EE A 21 Transparenoy eta wad Kapa aa nio BA eee A 18 Paper Cassette Loading Paper 0 0 00 cece eee eens 2 22 Non Standrd Paper Size aa 4 30 Paper Feed source aa 4 39 Paper Size zc aga Bahan E ades Gud Eus 4 28 Paper Type sca bee arbe n bre km Bae 4 29 4 33 Standard Paper Size 2 2 0 0 a 4 28 Paper cassette clearing paper jams 000000 8 20 Paper Feed Mode 000000 eee eeee 4 40 Paper Feeder 000 cece eee eee eae A 9 Loading Paper 0 0 cece eee eee ene 2 22 Paper Feed source 2 0 2 0 a 4 39 Pap
184. een appears Date Sm OK Month Day Year 04 2012 Time Zone Estn Time 3 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the year month and day Use lt and gt to move the cursor right and left 4 Press OK The date is set and the Date Setting menu reappears Time time setting 1 Inthe Date Setting menu press A or V to select Time Press OK The Time screen appears Time Sma OK Hour Min Second gt 45 50 Time Zone Estn Time 3 Use the numeric keys or A or V to set the hour minute and second Use lt and gt to move the cursor right and left 4 Press OK The time is set andthe Date Setting menu reappears Date Format date format selection One of three formats can be selected for the date format 1 Inthe Date Setting menu press A or V to select Date Format Operation Panel Date Format em 0 Month Davy Year 3 Day Month Year Year Month Day Time Zone time difference setting Set the time difference from GMT Time Zone om 05 00 Bogota 05 00 Estn Time 04 30 Caracas Summer Time summer time setting Set summer time o Off 62 On Summer Time mb mb Press OK The Date Format screen appears Press A or V to select the desired date format The following date formats can be selected Month Day Year Day Month Year Year Month Day Press OK The date fo
185. emory Paper Feeder 500 sheet x Feeder 500 sheet x 4 SSD 4 SSD HD 6 SD Card Network Interface Kit HD 6 SD Card Network IB 50 Wireless Network Interface Kit IB 51 Interface Kit IB 50 Wireless Parallel Interface Kit IB 32 Bulk Paper Network Interface Kit IB 51 Feeder PF 315 Faceup Output Tray PT Parallel Interface Kit IB 32 320 Bulk Paper Feeder PF 315 t The value is at Energy Saver mode default Paper Feeder PF 320 Option Item Description The maximum number of paper cassettes 4 Paper size Envelope Monarch Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Executive 8 1 2 x 11 Letter 8 1 2 x 14 Legal A4 B5 A5 B6 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 ISO B5 Oufuku Hagaki Oficio Il 216 x 340 mm 16K Statement Folio Youkei 2 Youkei 4 and Custom Paper type Plain Preprinted Bond Recycled Rough Letterhead Color Prepunched Envelope High Quality and CUSTOM 1 to 8 Paper capacity 500 sheets 80 g m Dimensions W x D x H 380 x 410 x 121 mm 15 x 16 1 8 x 4 3 4 Weight 4 0 kg or less 8 8 Ibs or less A 26 Appendix Bulk Paper Feeder PF 315 Option Item Description Paper size Envelope Monarch Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Executive Letter A4 B5 A5 A6 B6 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 ISO B5 Custom Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki 16K Statement Youkei 2 and Youkei 4 Paper type Plain Transparency Prepri
186. er Size 2 6 es 4 28 4 30 Paper Type vans tia neia sani s portta 4 29 4 33 Paper feeder clearing paper jams eee eee eee 8 20 Paper Jams iecur eae e Erud re PESE ERE 8 17 Locations AA 8 17 M6SS4096 rtu pets RES Gok ye ERE EE 8 18 Paper Output 4 zu ue rep RETE PRSE ER eM dana 4 42 Paper Size Dial ma eorr ee 4 29 Paper Stoppet xx siene NG enh Kadi E e E a 1 2 Paper stopper ics Re AN Rn Eom Ee En 2 30 Parallel Interface Kit 2000000 00s A 10 Postcards ee cs doris rins eee od eee eee EE ee A 20 Power Cord Connector n asaan eee 1 4 Power Cord Connector Cover aaa 1 4 Power Switch 20000 1 2 Preprinted Paper cece eeee A 21 Print Density creces G PK pA PIA ANG NAG NG has 4 49 Print Quality 2 ee 4 48 Problems a Saves Ron Rene nig ae See 8 3 Print quality problems troubleshooting lessen 8 3 Print Resolution 00000 eee eee eee 4 49 Printer Driver 00 cece eee eee eee 2 7 ueni ancann add ore ee ee AA AA 2 10 WINDOWS fe oos Ls PN AA LUE ELE 2 7 Printer Driver Help 0 0 00 cece eee eee 3 5 Printing from Applications llle 3 2 Prolonged non use 2 7 10 R ANYA AN e quud rs uu 4 81 Rear GOVE jcc esa cea casa d a pe Roa ee ee EORR RUD 1 4 Rear unit clearing paper jams sss 8 23 Recycled paper 000 c eee eee sss A 21 S SD SDHC Memory Card issues Glossary 3 F
187. er to Restart Network Restarting the network card on page 4 61 Printing a Status Page After completing the network settings print a status page The status page allows you to confirm a range of information including network addresses and network protocols To print a status page select Status Page from the Report Print menu Refer to Report Print on page 4 10 for detailed information 2 6 Preparation before Use Installing Software Ensure the printer is plugged in and connected to the PC before installing the printer driver and utilities from the Product Library disc Software The following software can be installed from the provided Product Library disc In Express Mode the KX Driver and Fonts are installed automatically In Custom Mode select and install the software Installed as standard O Installed if selected Installation Method Software Function Description Express Custom Mode Mode KX DRIVER Print Driver for printing files on a computer with the o Q machine This printer driver enables full use of the machine s features KX XPS DRIVER Printer driver for the XPS XML Paper Q Specification format developed by Microsoft Corporation Use the XPS driver to print from applications that support XPS Windows 7 Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 R2 only PCL mini driver A Microsoft Mini Driver type driver which emulates O KPDL minicdri and outputs both PCL an
188. eration Panel 3 Press A or V to select whether HTTPS is enabled 4 Press OK The HTTPS setting is set and the SSL Setting menu reappears IPSec IPSec setting IPSec IP Security Protocol is a security protocol adopted as the standard by the IETF for authentication and encryption in the third network layer IP layer It can be used with both IPv4 and IPv6 Note IPv4 uses 32 bit IP addresses and IPv6 uses 128 bit IP addresses The default setting is of f 1 Inthe Network Security menu press A or V to select IPSec A Press OK The IPSec screen appears IPSec lt 0 Moff 02 On 3 Press A or V to select whether IPSec is enabled 4 Press OK The IPSec setting is set and the Network Security menu reappears ThinPrint Thin Print setting Select whether or not to communicate using ThinPrint SSL settings can also be selected The default setting is On Note Thin Print is only displayed when the optional UG 33 has been activated 1 Inthe Network Security menu press A or V to select ThinPrint n 2 Press OK The ThinPrint menu screen appears ThinPrint 9 OK Off On ThinPrintOverSSL Exit 3 Press A or V to select Of On 4 Press OK The 0f f 0n screen appears OTff On Ema OK ore 4 102 Operation Panel o Press or V to select whether Thin Print is enabled 6 Press OK The Thin Print is set and the
189. eration Panel XPS FitTo Page Adjusting the XPS file print out size Select On in this setting to enlarge or reduce XPS files to fit the printable area during printing Function paid OK Duplex EcoPrint File Name Entry XPS FitTo Page pad OK 62 On 1 N A In the Copies menu or the Paper Source menu press Function Right Select The Function menu appears Press A or V to select XPS FitTo Page Press OK The XPS FitTo Page screen appears Press A or V to select whether XPS FitTo Page mode is enabled Press OK The XPS FitTo Page setting is set and the Function menu reappears Detail Shows the details of the selected file Use this to view detailed information on the files and folders in the USB memory Detail In File Name 1 4 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST Detail Detail Dn Folder Name 1 2 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST Detail Detail 0 File Name 1 4 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST Detail 1 Use the procedure described in Print File Printing and checking the files in the USB memory on page 4 17 to display a list of the files or folders you want to check Press A or V to select the folder or file you want to check Press Detail Right Select The Detail screen appears If you selected a file there are 4 Detail screens Press lt or gt to move betwee
190. es This selects the method for connecting to the wireless network Set Ad Hoc when machines will be connected directly with each other without going through an access point 1 Inthe custom Setup menu press A or V to select Connection Mode A 2 Press OK The Connection Mode screen appears Connection Mode MG 0 Ad Hoc 2 Infrastructure Ad Hoc Connect without going through access points Hu Infrastructure Connect via an access point The available Connection Mode are as follows 4 66 Operation Panel 3 Press A or V to select the connection mode 4 Press OK The Custom Setup menu reappears Channel Channel settings This sets the Channel to be used in the wireless network 1 Inthe custom Setup menu press A or V to select Channel T 2 Press OK The Channel screen appears Channel Pu OK 1 11 3 Enter the Channel number using the numeric keys A or V Note The Channel can be set between 1 and 11 4 Press OK The Custom Setup menu reappears Netwk Authentic Network Authentication setting This sets the authentication method to be used when connecting to an access point Note You can also configure the network authentication setting for WPA Enterprise and WPA2 Enterprise using SJ the web page of the optional wireless network interface kit IB 51 For details refer to the B 51 User s Manual 1 Inthe custom Setup menu press A or V to select Netwk Aut
191. es to the conservation of forest resources Duplex mode also reduces the amount of paper that must be purchased and thereby reduces cost It is recommended that machines capable of duplex printing be set to use duplex mode by default Resource Saving Paper For the preservation and sustainable use of forest resources it is recommended that recycled as well as virgin paper certified under environmental stewardship initiatives or carrying recognised ecolabels which meet EN 12281 2002 1 or an equivalent quality standard be used This machine also supports printing on 64 g m paper Using such paper containing less raw materials can lead to further saving of forest resources 1 EN12281 2002 Printing and business paper Requirements for copy paper for dry toner imaging processes Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types Environmental benefits of Power Management To reduce power consumption when idle this machine is equipped with a power management function that automatically activates energy saving mode when the machine is idle for a certain period of time Although it takes the machine a slight amount of time to return to READY mode when in energy saving mode a significant reduction in energy consumption is possible It is recommended that the machine be used with the activation time for energy saving mode set to the default setting viii Energy Star ENERGY STAR We have
192. esume normal operation will be longer than for quick recovery mode For more information on Energy Saver settings refer to Sleep Level Set Sleep level setting on page 4 88 Power Off Timer If the printer is not used while in sleep mode the power automatically turns off The Power Off Timer is used to set the time until the power turns off The factory setting for the time until the power turns off is 1 hour IMPORTANT You can set the power off rule and power off timer For details refer to Power Off Rule Power Off Rule setting on page 4 90 and Power Off Timer Power off timer settings on page 4 91 In case of not using the printer for an extended period of time CAUTION If this printer will be left unused for an extended period e g overnight turn it off at the power switch If the printer will not be used for an even longer period of time e g vacation remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution CAUTION Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity 2 21 Preparation before Use Loading Paper The following explains the procedure for loading paper in the cassette and the MP tray Loading Paper into the Cassette The standard cassette holds up to 500 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m The following paper sizes are supported 8 1 2 x 14 Legal Oficio Il 8 1 2 x 11 Letter Executive Statement A4 B5 A5 A6 B6 Folio 216 x
193. et and the Print Settings menu reappears 4 53 Operation Panel Network Network settings This printer supports TCP IP and TCP IP IPv6 protocols IP is an abbreviation for Internet Protocol This printer routinely uses the TCP IP IPv4 protocol but provides a separate setting for the next generation IP IPv6 TCP IP IPv4 uses 32 bit IP addresses but the rapid growth in the number of Internet users has resulted in a shortage of IP addresses IPv6 was developed to expand the range of available IP addresses by using 128 bit IP addresses The options available in the Network settings are as follows TCP IP Enable Disable TCP IP 4 54 Pv4 Setting TCP IP IPv4 settings 4 55 IPv6 Setting TCP IP IPv6 settings 4 58 Protocol Detail Detailed settings for the network protocol 4 60 Restart Network Restarting the network card 4 61 Note Check with your network administrator when selecting the network setting After all network related settings SJ have been done restart the network Refer to Restart Network Restarting the network card on page 4 61 This is mandatory to make the settings effective When Command Center RX is used network parameters and security settings can be conveniently changed and checked from your PC For more information refer to the Command Center RX User Guide 1 Press Menu 2 Press or V to select Network 3 Press OK The Network menu screen appears Network D
194. et to On printing will be automatically resumed after a preset period of time Limit exceeded You cannot add any more The added box exceeded the maximum number of box Delete it if there is a unnecessary box For details refer to Custom Box operation Box creation editing and deletion on page 5 5 Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action Load paper in cassette A4 v4 Different paper size is set Check paper size The size of the paper in the cassette and the paper size on the paper size dial are not the same Check the paper size Load paper in cassette A4 Plain The paper cassette matching the paper size and paper type of the print job is empty Load paper into the paper cassette as displayed in place of Press OK to resume printing If you want to print from a different paper source press Alt Left Select to display Alternative and you can change the source for paper feeding You can abandon printing by pressing Cancel Load paper in MP tray A4 Plain There is no paper cassette installed in the printer that matches the paper size and paper type of the print job Set paper in the MP tray Press OK to resume printing Note that feeding the paper having a paper size which does not match the current paper size from the MP tray can cause paper jam If you want to print from a different paper source
195. f 0n screen appears TI n S 01 Of f 02 On 5 Press A or V to select On or Off m E 6 Press OK The Auto File Del menu screen reappears Auto File Del lt gt Off On Note If on has been selected set the number of days for storage Period S amp N as the Period Period is only displayed if it has been set to On a 7 Press A or V to select Period Document Box 4 8 Press OK The Period screen appears Period 9 OK i 31 W day s 9 Enter the number of days for storage using the numeric keys A or V 10 Press OK The Detail menu screen reappears Overwrite Set Setting of overwrite storage This setting is used to permit or prohibit the overwriting of old documents that have been stored for the storage of new documents 1 Inthe Detail menu screen press lt or gt to select overwrite Detail PIL ox Set Overwrite Set 8 9 Permit Change 2 Press Change Right Select The Overwrite Set screen a a lt gt Overwrite Set v ok appears 01 4 Permit Prohibit 3 Press A or V to select Permit or Prohibit 4 Press OK The Detai1 menu screen reappears Del afterPrint Setting for file deletion after printing This automatically deletes the documents from the Boxes when the printing is complete 1 Inthe Detail menu screen press lt or gt to select Del Detail etn afterPrint Del afterPrint 9 9 Get
196. g Note It is possible to check the status of data sanitization implementation on the Status page For details refer to Ss Status Page Printing a printer s status page on page 4 12 1 Inthe Data Security menu press A or V to select DataSanitization 2 Press OK A confirmation message is displayed 3 Press Yes Left Select The message Sanitizing the Sanitize the data data appears and the data sanitization begins Are you sure pi M Note When an optional SSD HD 6 is installed the printer This process will JI automatically restarts before data sanitization take a while Yes NI No Pressing No Right Select returns to the Data Security menu without sanitizing the data me 4 When the data sanitization is finished Complet is displayed Press Sanitizing the data OK Right Select and turn the power switch off Main Memory Complet Note It is possible to check the result of data sanitization on SSD Complet the Status page For details refer to Status Page Printing a printer s status page on page 4 12 OK 4 108 Operation Panel User Job Account User Login Setting Job Account setting It is possible to set User Login Administration and Job Accounting on this machine User Job Account has the following items User Login Set User login setting 4 109 Job Account Set Job Account setting 4 120 User Login Set User login setting
197. g No Right Select returns to the Printed Pages L 8o JI NG Counter Reset menu screen without resetting the counter La Account List Account List operation This specifies the setting for the department to be used for setting Job Accounting Add Account registration Use this procedure to add a new account Note Because account IDs are managed as numeric strings 1 and 001 are handled as different accounts Also once Job Accounting is enabled no jobs are printed unless information is attached showing the accounts from which the jobs are being printed 1 Inthe Job Account Set menu press A or V to select Account List Account List tm 2 Press OK The Account List menu appears showing a list of the registered accounts in ascending order 200122 893485739 Add 4 123 Operation Panel 3 Press Add Right Select The Account ID menu screen Account ID 0m appears 1228 A Use the numeric keys to enter the account ID to be added 5 Press OK Once the account has been added a list of selection e A 221228 7 options appears 01 Detail Edit Delete Exit This message appears if the account ID has already been registered This account ID is already registered Detail Edit Checking editing registered account ID settings This procedure allows you to check or edit registered accounts 1 Inthe Job Accou
198. g No Right Select returns to the Report Print menu without printing the status page The numbers in the following diagram refer the items explained below the diagram The items and values on the status page may vary depending on the printer s firmware version Status Page Printer GI Firmware version 2 Group Settings Print Settings Device Common Settings Option Status KYOCERA Memory Data Sanitization Toner Gauges 10 SS Ecoss Operation Panel Firmware Version This item shows the version and release date of the printer firmware Printer Settings Information This item shows various printer settings for hardware related items MP tray paper size and type Paper cassette size and type Copies EcoPrint KIR mode Resolution MP tray priority Sleep level Sleep time Power off time Form feed timeout time MP tray empty Installed Options This item shows the options installed in the printer Paper Feeder Bulk Feeder SD SDHC memory card SSD Card Authentication Kit B Data Security Kit E UG 33 Network Status This item shows the IP address subnet mask address and default gateway address for the network interface card in the printer Note Only displayed on network compatible models Interface Information This information shows the block status for items including the USB memory slot and USB i
199. ge Restrict Setting for maximum possible capacity usage 5 9 Auto File Del Yes Yes Yes Auto File Del Setting for automatic file deletion 5 10 Overwrite Set Yes Yes Yes Overwrite Set Setting of overwrite storage 5 11 Del afterPrint Yes Yes Yes Del afterPrint Setting for file deletion after printing 5 11 Yes The setting can be changed No The setting cannot be changed No setting 5 6 Document Box Box Name Change the Box name Change the Box name Detail PIL OK Box Name 1 9 Box03 Edit Box Name Entry pad OK Box03l A ABC Text Owner Owner settings 1 Inthe Detail menu screen press lt or gt to select Box Name 2 Press Edit Right Select The Box Name Entry screen appears 3 Enter the Box Name using the numeric keys Note Up to 32 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 for details on entering characters 4 Press OK The Detail menu screen reappears When user login administration is enabled set the owner of the Box If the owner is not set then the owner name is displayed Detail Ln Owner 2 9 Smith Change User setting Dn Network User None Login User Name 0 ABC Text 1 Inthe Detail menu screen press lt or gt to select Owner 2 Press Change Right Select The User setting sc
200. hange the capacity of the box For details refer to Custom Box operation Box creation editing and deletion on page 5 5 Canceling Cannot connect Displayed when data is being canceled It was not possible to connect to the network with the optional wireless network interface kit Check the settings of the wireless network interface For details refer to Optional Network Optional Network settings on page 4 62 8 6 Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action Cannot connect to Authentication Server Check the domain name Press OK and check the following items Registration to Authentication Server Password and computer address for Authentication Server Connection of Network For details refer to Netwk Auth Set Netwk authentication setting on page 4 111 Cannot connect Multiple access points are enabled Multiple access points were detected with the optional wireless network interface kit Check the settings of the wireless network interface For details refer to Optional Network Optional Network settings on page 4 62 Cannot duplex print on this paper You attempted to print with a paper size and paper type that cannot be used for duplex printing Press OK to print onto one side of the paper only Cannot execute this job Restricted by Authorization settings This message is shown when operations are re
201. he 1 and gt to move between menu options one page at a time USB Memory Counter Exit l If lt 4 gt appears in the top right of the screen you can use the lt and gt Detail m to switch between pages File Name 1 4 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST Detail To return to the menu one level up press Back Setting a Menu NG Select the desired menu and press OK You can now select options in Media Type 9 Ok the menu Press A V lt or gt to select or enter the desired setting and o Plain then press OK to confirm your selection Preprinted If you are choosing from a list of settings an asterisk is displayed to Bond the left of the currently selected setting Canceling Menu Selection If you press Menu when a menu is selected the message display returns to Ready to print 4 8 Operation Panel Setting a Mode Selection Menu This section explains the setting procedures used for each menu item in the mode selection menu Menu Sma OK USB Memory Counter Exit 1 While the printer displays Ready to print Please wait and Processing press MENU The mode selection menu is displayed Each time you press A or V the selection changes Report Print 4 10 USB Memory 4 17 Counter 4 25 Paper Settings 4 26 Print Settings 4 39 Network 4 54 Optional Network 4 62 Device Common 4 74 Security 4 96 User Job Account 4 109 Adjus
202. he Unknown ID Job screen appears Reject Not printed Permit Printed Press A or V to select a setting and then press OK The Job Account Set menu list reappears 4 127 Operation Panel Adjust Maint Adjust Maintenance selection setting Adjust Maintenance is used to adjust the print quality and to carry out printer maintenance The options available in Adjust Maintenance are as follows Restart Restart Printer 4 128 Service Setting for Maintenance 4 128 IMPORTANT Service Setting is primarily a menu used by service personnel for maintenance work There is no need for customers to use this menu 1 Press Menu 2 Press A or V to select Adjust Maint 3 Press OK The Adjust Maint menu appears showing a list of Adjust Maint lt m available options Restart Service Setting Exit Restart Restart Printer The procedure described below resets the printer s temporary conditions such as the current page orientation font etc set by commands to their default values Downloaded fonts and macros are deleted from the printer s memory 1 Inthe Adjust Maint menu screen press A or V to select Restart 2 Press OK A confirmation screen appears Restart Are vou Subs Press Yes Left Select The printer is restarted Pressing No Right Select returns to the Adjust Maint menu screen without restarting the printer Yes im No Servic
203. he number indicates the location of the font as shown below I Internal font S Soft downloaded font M Fonts in optional SD SDHC card H Fonts in RAM disk or optional SSD 10 Press OK The default font is set and the Font menu reappears Selecting Regular or Dark Courier Letter Gothic Courier or Letter Gothic font thickness can be selected as Regular or Dark In the procedure below it is assumed that Courier is selected The procedure is the same for Letter Gothic 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Font n 2 Press OK The Font menu screen appears Font Rud OK Font Type Font ID Courier Exit 3 Press A or V to select Courier If you are selecting the thickness of the Letter Gothic font choose Letter Gothic here instead A 4 Press OK The Courier screen appears Courier Smid OK 01 Regular 02 Dark 5 Press A or V to select Regular or Dark 6 Press OK The font thickness is set and the Font menu reappears Changing the Default Font Size You can change the size of the default font If you selected a proportional font the character size can be changed 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Font 2 Press OK The Font menu screen appears Font Sma OK Font ID Courier Exit 3 Press or V to select Size 4 46 Operation Panel 4 Press OK The Size entry screen appears Size Sma OK
204. he paper guides and insert as far as it will go 6 For portrait form envelopes open the flap Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides keeping the printing side face up and the edge with the flap facing towards you For landscape form envelopes close the flap Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides keeping the printing side face up and the edge with the flap facing towards the left When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray Load envelope with the print side facing up the flap Cardstock Hagaki Landscape form envelopes Return postcard Oufuku Hagaki Portrait form envelopes Open the flap Note Use unfolded return postcard Oufuku Hagaki 2 29 Preparation before Use IMPORTANT How to load envelopes orientation and facing will differ depending on the type of envelope Be sure to load it in correctly otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face Note When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray SJ select the envelope type by referring to Media Type Paper type setting for the MP tray on page 4 27 Paper stopper When using paper large than A4 Letter open the paper stopper shown in the figure 2 30 3 Printing This chapter contains explanations on the following topics Pining trom Applications sssrin a NANANA 3
205. he printer displays a list of files stored in the Custom 20001 ABC box em Box PAAAAA Z 3 BBBB X Menu Select Note If the screen for entering a password is displayed then enter the password using the numeric keys and then press OK 4 4 Refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 for details on entering characters Box number Box name Select a File To print delete a file in the Custom Box first select the file to be printed or deleted 1 Press or V to select the file to be printed deleted 2 When select Right Select is pressed the file is selected A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file 30001 ABC box paid OK B AAAA Ki 3 BBBB Menu 4 Select the checkmarked file and press Select Right Select again to cancel the selection S Al Note To select all files follow the steps of Select Deselect All Select SJ Files on page 5 16 ng Select Deselect All Files All files in the Custom Box are selected 7 1 Inthe file list screen press A or V to select All Files 0001 ABC box paid OK S AAAA o 3 BBBB O Menu Select Document Box S AAAA BBBB Menu 30001 ABC box D NN Select 30001 ABC box D S AAAA o BBBB O Menu Select Print a File
206. hentic F 2 Press OK The Netwk Authentic screen appears Netwk Authentic NG NN foj open O O O OOO The available authentication methods are as follows 62 Shared Open WPA PSK Shared WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Note wPA PSK and WPA2 PSK are only displayed when SJ Infrastructure has been set as the Connection mode Switch between connection modes on page 4 66 3 Press or V to select the desired authentication method 4 Press OK The Custom Setup menu reappears Encryption Encryption settings This selects the encryption settings Note This setting is not displayed when the setting for Netwk Authentic Network Authentication setting on page amp 4 67 is set to use an authentication method other than Open Shared WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK using Utility 1 Inthe custom Setup menu press A or V to select Encryption 4 67 Operation Panel A Encryption pai OK Data Encryption WEP Key Exit Data Encryption Data Encryption setting This sets the encryption method Data Encryption m 01 4Di sable 02 WEP WEP Key WEP Key settings This registers the WEP Key WEP Key Dn Edit WEP Key ping OK A ABC Text 2 Press OK The Encryption screen appears The following operations are possible Data Encryption Data Encryption setting 4 68 WEP Key WEP Key settings 4 68 Preshared
207. ht Select is pressed the file is selected A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file Select the checkmarked file and press Select Right Select again to cancel the selection Note To select all files follow the steps of Select Deselect All amp N Files on page 5 26 1 In the file list screen press A or V to select A11 Files 5 26 Document Box 2 Press Select Right Select 2 User01 D m All Fil When all files in the Job Box are checked all checkmarked files are acad deselected 3Data01 doc 1203130 3Data02 doc 1203130 Select When there is a file not checked in the Job Box all files will be User01 uU checkmarked Data01 doc 12031344 3Data02 doc 12031344 Select Print a File Print the file s selected in the Job Box h 1 In the file list screen select the item and press OK The Print amp User0l lt m Delete menu screen appears Print Delete 2 Press or V to select Print and press OK The Copies menu Copies oU screen appears 1 999 wag To print 2 or more copies use the numeric keys or press A or V to Bil copies set the number of copies to be printed Note is displayed first and it means it according to the set SJ number of copies when the data of each file is preserved In this setting each set number of copies is printed 3 Press OK The message Accep
208. ich you want to set the duplex printing permission 4 Press OK A menu for the selected media is displayed CUSTOM 1 pad OK Paper Weight Duplex Name Entry Exit 5 Press A or V to select Duplex 6 Press OK The Duplex screen appears listing the paper weights that can used with the printer Dupl ex Sma OK 62 Prohibit N Press A or V to specify whether duplex printing is permitted 8 Press OK The duplex printing permission is set and the Media Type Set screen reappears Operation Panel Use the procedure below to register the name to be displayed for the custom paper 1 Inthe Paper Settings menu press A or V to select Media Type Set 2 Press OK The Media Type Set screen appears listing the Media Type Set lt gt media types that can used with the printer Transparency Preprinted Exit 3 Press or V to select the custom paper CUSTOM 1 to 8 for which you want to register a name to display 4 Press OK A menu for the selected media is displayed CUSTOM 1 pag Ok Paper Weight Duplex Name Entry Exit 5 Press or V to select Name Entry A 6 Press OK The Name Entry screen appears Name Entry 9 Ok 4 ABC Text 7 Use the numeric keys to enter the name to display for the custom paper Note Up to 16 characters can be entered For details on entering characters refer to Characte
209. ings The options available in Network Security are as follows WSD PRINT WSD PRINT setting 4 98 Enhanced WSD Enhanced WSD setting 4 98 EnhancedWSD SSL Enhanced WSD SSL setting 4 98 IPP IPP setting 4 99 SSL Setting SSL Server setting 4 99 IPSec IPSec setting 4 102 ThinPrint Thin Print setting 4 102 LAN Interface LAN Interface setting 4 103 Network Security Enhanced WSD EnhancedWSD SSL Exit 1 Inthe security menu press A or V to select Network Security 2 Press OK The Network Security menu screen appears Operation Panel WSD PRINT WSD PRINT setting Select whether or not to use WSD Print The default setting is On WSD PRINT D Off 1 2 In the Network Security menu press A or V to select WSD PRINT Press OK The WSD PRINT screen appears Press A or V to select whether WSD PRINT is enabled Press OK The WSD PRINT setting is set and the Network Security menu reappears Enhanced WSD Enhanced WSD setting Set whether to use our proprietary web services Network driver use this Enhanced WSD Web service The default setting is On Enhanced WSD D Off PI 02 4On 1 2 Inthe Network Security menu press A or V to select Enhanced WSD Press OK The Enhanced WSD screen appears Press A or V to select whether Enhanced WSD is enabled
210. int The Print dialog box displays 2 Click the drop down list of printer names All the printers installed in Windows are listed Click the name of the machine 3 Click Properties The Properties dialog box displays 4 Click the Job tab and select the Job storage e MPS check box to set the function e A A fm Kyocera FS 4300DN KX Properties ea Basic Layout Imaging Fuse t dances V Job storage e MPS Job name ek x Application defined 1 NG abc pp T Quick copy y 4 Don t use application name Proof and hold Custom Private print Job storage Overwrite job name Use job name date andti v Settings Method for setting the printer driver Custom Box 1 Select Custom box 2 Click Settings 3 Select a Custom Box Settings option Select Use specific box number and type the box number and password Select Prompt for box number and click OK When the Custom Box dialog box appears type a box number from the Defined custom boxes list If a password was set type the password Select Display box number list and click OK When the Custom Box dialog box appears select a box from the list If a password was set type the password This can be selected if Shared box is selected in the SSD Settings dialog box Select Verify box number for each login user and click OK When the Custom Box dialog box appears type a box number To include a password select Require pa
211. inter KPDL KPDL Auto Memory Standard 128 MB 256 MB Maximum 1152 MB 1280 MB Dimensions W x D x H 380 x 416 x 285 mm 15 x 16 3 8 x 11 1 4 380 x 416 x 320 mm 15 x 16 3 8 x 12 5 8 Weight Approx 13 5 kg 29 7 Ibs Approx 14 6 kg 32 12 Ibs Power Requirement 120 V 60 Hz 8 3 A 220 240 V 50 Hz 60 Hz 4 4 A 120 V 60 Hz 9 7 A 220 240 V 50 Hz 60 Hz 5 2A A 24 Appendix Description Item FS 2100D FS 2100DN FS 4100DN FS 4200DN FS 4300DN Power Maximum 925 W 928 W 1148 W 1153 W 1164 W Consumption U S A U S A U S A U S A U S A Standard Canada Canada Canada Canada Canada 986 W 995 W 1218W 1222 W 1238 W European European European European European countries countries countries countries countries During Printing 632 W 593 W 644 W 690 W 783 W U S A U S A U S A U S A U S A Canada Canada Canada Canada Canada 564 W 584 W 618W 677 W 757 W European European European European European countries countries countries countries countries During Standby 10 6 W 11 7W 12 7 W 12 5 W 12 5 W U S A U S A U S A U S A U S A Canada Canada Canada Canada Canada 11 5 W 12 2 W 13 3 W 12 8 W 131W European European European European European countries countries countries countries countries Sleep Modet 2 6 W U S A 1 7 W U S A 1 8 W U S A 1 8 W U S A 1 8 W U S A C
212. inter is open Close the rear cover Close rear cover The top cover of the printer is open Close the printer top cover Close top cover The developer unit is either not installed or incorrectly inserted Developer unit is not Insert the developer unit securely installed Contact your Service Representative The drum unit is either not installed or incorrectly inserted Drum unit is not Insert the drum unit securely insta L bed Contact your Service Representative Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action The IPv6 address entered in the host name is not enclosed in brackets To Enclose enter the IPv6 address enclose the address in brackets the cG Pes adaress in e g Bae3 9a0 cd05 b1d2 28a 1fc0 a1 10ae 140 brackets Envelope mode Displayed when the envelope switches are set to envelope mode Error occurred Turn the main power and on HERH switch off Press the power switch to turn off and then press it again to turn on If this message still remains press the power switch to turn off and contact your service representative Failed to get the network user information An error occurred when obtaining user information after the authentication Log in again File was deleted Check the document box The file or box selected does not exist Check that the box has not been deleted or that the file has n
213. inting mode is set and the Print Settings menu reappears Paper Output Selecting the output stack The Paper Output menu on the operation panel allows you to select either the face down tray or the faceup tray option for the output stack Paper Output tm o TopTray FaceDown 2 RearTray FaceUp 1 2 Note This menu can be used for FS 4100DN FS 4200DN and FS 4300DN In the Print Settings menu press A or V to select Paper Output Press OK The Paper Output screen appears Press A or V to select output stack TopTray FaceDown or Rear Tray FaceUp Press OK The output stack is set and the Print Settings menu reappears Override A4 LTR Overriding difference between A4 and Letter When the Override A4 LTR is turned On using the operation panel the printer ignores the difference between A4 and Letter paper sizes Printing is performed without an error message even if the actual paper size in the current cassette differs from the paper size formatting the job By default this feature is On Override A4 LTR 0m Off Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Override A4 LTR Press OK The Override A4 LTR screen appears Press A or V to select Off or On Press OK The Print Settings menu reappears 4 42 Operation Panel Emulation Setting the emulation You can change the emulation mode Use the procedure below to select the mode Emula
214. iver on page 5 34 or the Printer Driver User Guide Note When using the RAM disk to use Job Box set the RAM disk mode to On When using the SSD HD 6 or an SD SDHC memory card to use Job Box set the RAM disk mode to Off For details refer to RAM Disk Setting Using the RAM disk on page 4 81 Job Retention Job Retention has four modes as summarized below These modes are selected from the printer driver through the application software Quick Copy Proof and Hold Private Print Stored Job Primary function To later print additional copies To proof the first copy before printing multiple copies To hold the document in printer to prevent unauthorized access To electronically store documents such as fax cover pages Start storing by Printer driver Printer driver Printer driver Printer driver On terminating print setting from application software Prints simultaneously Prints one copy simultaneously Does not print Does not print Retrieved by Operation panel Operation panel Operation panel Operation panel Default number of copies printed at retrieval Same as storing can be changed One less can be changed Same as storing can be changed One can be changed Maximum number of 300 300 Depends on the SSD Depends on the SSD jobs stored T or SD SDHC memory or SD SDHC memory card capacity the job card capacity is autom
215. k Interface Parameters This printer supports TCP IP IPv4 TCP IP IPv6 IPP SSL Server and the IPSec protocols and Security Level The table below shows the items required for each of the settings Configure the printer s network parameters as appropriate for your PC and your network environment Menu Submenu Setting Network TCP IP Settings TCP IP On Off IPv4 Setting DHCP On Off Auto IP On Off IP Address IP address Subnet Mask IP address Default Gateway IP address Bonjour On Off IPv6 Setting TCP IP IPv6 On Off RA Sateless On Off DHCPv6 On Off Protocol Detail NetBEUI On Off SNMPv3 On Off FTP Server On Off SNMP On Off SMTP On Off POP3 On Off RAW Port On Off LPD On Off HTTP On Off LDAP On Off Restart Network Yes No Preparation before Use Menu Submenu Setting Security Network Security WSD PRINT On Off Enhanced WSD On Off EnhancedWSD SSL On Off IPP On Off SSL Setting SSL Off On On Off Encryption AES DES 3DES IPP over SSL On Off HTTPS On Off IPSec On Off Thin Print Off On On Off Thin Print over SSL On Off LAN Interface Auto 10BASE Half 10BASE Full 100BASE Half 100BASE Full 1000BASE T Note When the network settings have been changed restart the network card of the device This is mandatory to ss make the settings effective For details refer to Restart Network Restarting the ne
216. katha band 4 48 Emulation gcc hatakan Rh haa hha ated ed 4 43 Etror Repott aa naan BING Nama Hayate ENNA 4 43 Energy Star Program 1 2 2 0 eee eee ix Envelop Mode 000 cece eee eee eee eee 2 27 Envelope Switch 0 02 aaa i kn 1 4 Error Handling zi od oe ie tenet eos Ba 4 84 Duplex Paper Error eee eee eee 4 85 MP Tray Empty ciem oy edd dad da ed eek 4 85 Paper Mismatch 000 cee eee eee 4 85 Error Messages 0c eee eee eens 8 5 Expansion memory module ODON aaa be wehbe eed de Bka debi web ede ede A 5 F Faceup Output Tray 0 0 eee eee eee A 11 gem rr rcr NIE 4 45 Front Cover idis se Lido liani sure Pade Fu FRU Eds 1 3 Fuser Cover 0 0 2 2 0200 cece ec ee 1 4 ID Card Setting Ng Kap ma peepee ge ER 4 118 Indicator Attention x sum KANY AE Rr EP Re ERU Rus 1 5 4 3 Dat szssuouaca 9k Gceruc AA 1 5 4 3 Ready i teva nerd Ru Red Eus px EU 1 5 4 3 Inside the printer clearing paper jams sls 8 22 Installing Software lisse 2 7 Installing the Printer Driver Macintosh liliis es 2 10 p iec KANAN KG KANAN ANAN aiii Ei 2 7 Interface Cover 000 e eee eee 1 4 J Job Account setting 0 0 a 4 120 JOD BOX acest PEE PEDE 5 24 Settings laa BAe Siete eo rex wR rape Sarton als 5 32 Job Name 00 c eee 4 53 Job Retention cee eee eee 5 24 Index 1 Printer driver 2 eee 5 34 Private Prit
217. lders in the USB memory You can print the select file You can also view the details of the selected file or folder The options available in the Print File menu are as follows Display of File List 4 17 Print File Printing the selected file 4 18 Display of File List 1 Inthe USB Memory menu press A or V to select Print File n 2 Press OK File List appears showing a list of the files and folders in Print File 0 the USB memory If there are 4 or more files and folders pressing A or V repeatedly 3Folder 2 scrolls up or down through the list File l jpg Detail Operation Panel Press A or V to select a folder and then press OK BFolder 1 ok The folders and files in the selected folder are displayed xFolder 11 AFile3 tif rile4 pdf Detail IMPORTANT Print File only shows the PDF TIFF JPEG and XPS files in the USB memory Up to 3 folder levels can be displayed Depending on the USB memory capacity and the number of files the list may take some time to appear Print File Printing the selected file You can use this to specify printing for files in the USB memory 1 Use the procedure described in Print File Printing and checking the files in the USB memory on page 4 17 to display a list of the files in the folder containing the file you want to print 2 Press A or V to select the file you want to print 3 Press OK The Copies menu screen appears
218. le decrypt reverse engineer or decompile the Software Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety 90 days after delivery the Software will perform in accordance with Monotype Imaging published specifications and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs errors and omissions The parties agree that all other warranties expressed or implied including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability are excluded Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts upon their return to Monotype Imaging In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits lost data or any other incidental or consequential damages or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces Massachusetts U S A law governs this Agreement You shall not sublicense sell lease or otherwise transfer the Software and or Typefaces without the prior written consent of Monotype Imaging Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252 227 7013 subdivision b 3 ii or subparagraph c 1 ii as appropriate Further use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights s
219. lect The New Password entry screen New Password 9 Ok appears i 4 ABC Text 3 Enter the new password using the numeric keys Note Up to 16 characters can be entered For details on entering amp characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Document Box Confirm Password Ul Box number Change of the Box number Change the Box number Detail Box Number 0002 Edit Dn 5 9 0001 1000 0002 Box Number Entry NG 4 Press OK The Confirm Password entry screen appears 5 To confirm re enter the password to be registered Enter the password using the numeric keys 6 Press OK If the password is correct the setting is changed to the new password and the Detail menu screen reappears If the password is not correct the display shows Incorrect password and returns to the New Password screen so enter again from the new password 1 Inthe Detail menu screen press lt or gt to select Box Number 2 Press Edit Right Select The Box Name Entry screen appears 3 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to enter the Box Number Note Enter the Box Number as a four digit number from 0001 FI 1000 If the display shows This box number is already registered this Box Number is already in use Register a different Box Number 4 Press OK The Detail menu screen reappears Usage Restrict Setting for
220. led in the printer and protection is disabled Note Formatting will destroy any existing data on a storage device including a used SD SDHC memory card ss Formatting of the SD SDHC memory card must be executed from the printer When a new SD SDHC memory card is inserted in the printer s slot Format SD Card will appear on the message display 1 Inthe Device Common menu press A or V to select Format SD Card 2 Press OK A confirmation screen appears Format Are you sure gt SD Card Yes TELE No 3 Press ves Left Select The Formatting SD card screen appears and SD SDHC memory card formatting begins Once the formatting ends the standby screen reappears Pressing No Right Select returns to the Device Common menu without formatting the SD SDHC memory card Display Bright Display brightness setting Sets the brightness of the message display 1 Inthe Device Common menu press A or V to select Display Bright 4 83 Operation Panel 2 Press OK The Display Bright screen appears showing the Display Bright em available brightness settings Darker 2 The list shows the following brightness settings Darker 1 Darker 2 03 Normal 0 Darker 1 Normal O0 Lighter 1 Lighter 2 5 Press A or V to select the desired brightness 4 Press OK The brightness is set and the Device Common menu reappears Disp Backlight Display backlight setting
221. like smoke This is not a problem and you can continue printing If the steam concerns you raise the room temperature or replace the paper with a newer dryer paper Tips Printer problems may be solved easily by following the tips below When you have encountered a problem that following the above guidelines will not solve try the following Turn the printer power off and wait for several seconds Then turn on the printer Reboot the computer which sends the print jobs to the printer Obtain and use the latest version of the printer driver The latest versions of printer drivers and utilities are available at http www kyoceradocumentsolutions com Make sure that the procedures for printing are correctly followed in the application software Consult the documentation supplied with the application software Troubleshooting Print Quality Problems The tables and diagrams in the following sections define print quality problems and the corrective action you can conduct to solve the problems Some solutions may require cleaning or replacing parts of the printer If the suggested corrective action will not solve the problem call for service Printed Results Corrective Action Black or white vertical streaks The drum unit or developer unit may be damaged If the problem is not solved even after printing several pages call for service ABC ABC 143 123 Faint or blurred printing Check the EcoPrint set
222. lines This setting reduces the pen width value for vertical horizontal and diagonal lines All This setting reduces the pen width by a value of 1 for vertical horizontal and diagonal line used in barcodes or line drawings Note Line thinning is available when PCL XL is selected in the PDL Settings dialog box When GDI compatible mode is selected in the PDL Settings dialog box Line thinning is not available Correct fine line by device Enable correction of pen width by device This feature is available only on supported models Custom Box Optional Feature Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval You can create or delete a Custom Box and data can be exchanged in various ways To use a Custom Box an optional SSD must be installed in the printer For more details on Custom Box operation refer to Custom Box on page 5 4 Job Box Optional Feature Job Box holds temporary or permanent print data for use with job options including Private Print Stored Job Quick Copy and Proof and Hold which will be discussed later Four individual Job Boxes corresponding to these job options are already provided in the Document Box These Job Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user For more details on Job Box operation refer to Job Box on page 5 24 ThinPrint Activation Optional Feature This printer can select whether or not to communicate using ThinPrin
223. ltepec Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo Distrito Federal C P 11560 M xico Phone 52 555 383 2741 Fax 52 555 383 7804 KYOCERA Document Solutions Brazil Ltda Av Tambore 1180 Mod B 09 CEP 06460 000 Tambore Barueri SP Brazil Phone 55 11 4195 8496 Fax 55 11 4195 6167 KYOCERA Document Solutions Australia Pty Ltd Level 3 6 10 Talavera Road North Ryde N S W 2113 Australia Phone 61 2 9888 9999 Fax 61 2 9888 9588 KYOCERA Document Solutions New Zealand Ltd 1 3 Parkhead Place Albany Auckland 1330 New Zealand Phone 64 9 415 4517 Fax 64 9 415 4597 KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited 16 F Mita Centre 552 566 Castle Peak Road Tsuenwan NT Hong Kong Phone 852 2610 2181 Fax 852 2610 2063 KYOCERA Document Solutions China Corporation 8F No 288 Nanjing Road West Huangpu District Shanghai 200003 China Phone 86 21 5301 1777 Fax 86 21 5302 8300 KYOCERA Document Solutions Thailand Corp Ltd 335 Ratchadapisek Road Bangsue Bangkok 10800 Thailand Phone 66 2 586 0333 Fax 66 2 586 0278 KYOCERA Document Solutions Singapore Pte Ltd 12 Tai Seng Street 04 01A Luxasia Building Singapore 534118 Phone 65 6741 8733 Fax 65 6748 3788 KYOCERA Document Solutions Hong Kong Limited 16 F Mita Centre 552 566 Castle Peak Road Tsuenwan NT Hong Kong Phone 852 2429 7422 Fax 852 2423 2159 KYOCERA Document Solutions Taiwan Corporation 6F No 37 Sec
224. m 2 2 ConnectionStatus NetwkName SSID AAAA Detail Detail 0 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU VWXYZabcdefghijklmnop qrstuvwxyz1234567890 Quick Setup Eua OK AvailableNetwork Push Button PIN Device Exit AvailableNetwork Dl AccessPoint 001 AccessPoint 002 AccessPoint 003 H B Reload WEP Key lt 0 00000004 ABC Text 3 Press lor gt The NetwkName SSID is displayed 1 2 AvailableNetwork Display the access points 1 2 3 4 If the entire name shown as the NetwkName SSID will not fit on one line pressing Detail Right Select changes to a 3 line name display Quick Setup Quick setup for the wireless network When connecting to an access point which supports the automatic wireless network setup you can select the connection settings using Quick Setup In the Wireless Network menu press A or V to select Quick Setup Press OK The Quick Setup menu screen appears The following operations are possible AvailableNetwork Display the access points Push Button Connect using Push Button PIN Device Connect using a PIN code for the wireless network interface kit PIN Terminal Connect using a PIN code for the access point Displays the access points which can be connected to In the Quick Setup menu press A or V to AvailableNetwork
225. maximum possible capacity usage It is possible to restrict the capacity of Boxes in order to preserve the SSD capacity To limit the usage capacity enter the maximum value MB using the numeric keys The limit value will vary depending on the number of user Boxes that are created but it is possible to enter the maximum between 1 and 30 000 MB Detail n Usage Restrict 6 9 200MB Change 1 Inthe Detail menu screen press lt or gt to select Usage Restrict 5 9 Document Box n 2 Press Change Right Select The Usage Restrict screen Usage Restrict MG appears 30000 MB aun H 3 Enter the limit value using the numeric keys A or V 4 Press OK The Detail menu screen reappears Auto File Del Setting for automatic file deletion This automatically deletes the documents that have been saved after a fixed period Set to On for the automatic deletion and then enter the number of days that the documents will be stored Between 1 and 31 days can be entered Set to Of f if automatic deletion will not be used 1 Inthe Detail menu screen press lt or to select Auto File Detail 0 Del Auto File Del 7 9 Off Change n 2 Press Change Right Select The auto File Del menu Auto File Del Rud OK screen appears Off On 3 Press or V to select of On orca gt m 4 Press OK The 0f
226. me firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets If Bonjour does not run stably check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour Custom Box The Custom Box function stores print data for each individual user on the printer and allows the user to print single or multiple copies of the stored data later using the printer s operation panel DDSN Dynamic Domain Name System A Dynamic Domain Name System DDSN is a system for providing a fixed host name for IP addresses which change dynamically By updating the correspondence between the host name registered and the IP address as the IP address changes it is possible to connect with the same host name even when the IP address has changed Default Gateway This indicates the device such as a computer or router which serves as the entrance exit gateway for accessing computers outside the network that you are on When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP that automatically resolves IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses on a TCP IP network DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a
227. meout time 4 90 Power Off Rule Power Off Rule setting 4 90 Power Off Timer Power off timer settings 4 91 Auto Err Clear Auto error clear setting 4 91 Err Clear Timer Setting the error clear time 4 92 FormFeed TimeOut Automatic form feed timeout setting 4 92 1 Inthe Device Common menu press A or V to select Timer Setting A 2 Press OK The Login screen appears Login User Name W LLL Il HH Note When user login administration is set When logged in as an administrator the log in screen is not displayed and the Timer Setting menu screen is displayed Login Password Login il The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other than an administrator Log in again as an administrator 3 With the Login User Name entry field selected press OK The a A Login User Name Em Login User Name entry screen is displayed Text 4 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK The log in screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login User Name is Admin For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 4 86 Operation Panel z 5 Press A or V to select the Login Password entry field Login User Name Admin Login Password Login x 6 Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed Login Password ABC Text x 7
228. mory USB memory selection This specifies the settings for removing the USB memory and printing USB memory content The USB Memory menu automatically appears when you install the USB memory IMPORTANT This message is only displayed when the USB host block and USB Storage block are set to Unblock For more information please refer to I F Block Set External interface block setting on page 4 103 The options available in the USB Memory menu are as follows Print File Printing and checking the files in the USB memory 4 17 Display of File List 4 17 Print File Printing the selected file 4 18 Print Function Settings 4 19 Duplex Setting the duplex printing 4 19 EcoPrint Selecting the EcoPrint mode 4 19 File Name Entry Entering a file name 4 20 JobFinish Notice Setting for notification when jobs are finished 4 21 Encrypted PDF Entering the PDF password 4 21 TIFF JPEG Size Adjusting the TIFF JPEG file print out size 4 22 XPS FitTo Page Adjusting the XPS file print out size 4 23 Detail Shows the details of the selected file 4 23 Remove Memory Removing the USB memory 4 24 Press MENU 1 2 Press or V to select USB Memory 3 Press OK The USB Memory menu appears showing a list of USB Memory 3 available actions Print File Remove Memory Exit Print File Printing and checking the files in the USB memory This displays a list of the files and fo
229. mporarily move storage media and computer supplies such as floppy disks and USB memories away from the toner container This is to avoid damaging media by the magnetism of toner IMPORTANT Always clean the inside of the printer after replacing the toner cartridge For details refer to Cleaning the Printer on page 7 8 IMPORTANT Kyocera Document Solutions Inc is not liable against any damages or problems arising from the use of toner containers other than those designated as original Kyocera toner containers For optimum performance it is also recommended to use only the Kyocera toner containers which are specifically intended for use in your country or region If the toner container for another destination is installed the printer will stop printing IMPORTANT Before replacing the toner container remove the paper on the MP tray Note You do not have to turn printer power off before starting the replacement Any data that may be processing in amp the printer will be deleted if you turn the printer power off 1 Open the top cover 2 Turn the lock lever to the unlock position 7 3 Maintenance 3 Carefully remove the old toner container from the printer 4 Putthe old toner container in the plastic bag contained in the toner kit and discard it later according to the local code or regulations for waste disposal 5 Take the new toner container out of the toner kit 6 Shake the new toner container at least 10 times as shown
230. n Click File and select Print in the application The Print dialog box appears Click the W next to the Name field and select this machine from the list Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of copies box Enter any number up to 999 When there is more than one page select Collate to print out one by one in the sequence of the page numbers Click Properties The Properties dialog box appears Select the Basic tab and click Print Size to select the print size To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency click Media type menu and select the media type Click Source and select the paper source Note If you choose Auto source selection paper is supplied SS automatically from the paper source loaded with paper of 9 optimum size and type To print on special paper such as envelopes or thick paper place it on the multi purpose tray and select MP Tray Select paper orientation either Portrait or Landscape to match the orientation of the document Selecting Rotated will print the document rotated 180 Click OK to return to the Print dialog box 10 Click OK to start printing 1 While the printer displays Processing press Cancel The Job Cancel List appears showing the list of current print jobs Press A or V to display the desired job and then press OK When the Job will be canceled Are you sure message appears press Yes Left Select to cancel the job or No
231. n be reduced The printer prints one copy and at the same time saves the print job on the SSD SD SDHC memory card or RAM disk You can also change the number of copies when resuming printing from the operation panel 5 25 Document Box When the printer is turned off all stored jobs will be deleted Note Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide for the driver settings The following operations are possible Printing Additional Copies using Quick Copy Remaining Copies of a Proof and Hold Job 5 26 Select Deselect All Files 5 26 Print a File 5 27 Deleting a Quick Copy Proof and Hold Job 5 27 Delete a File 5 28 Printing Additional Copies using Quick Copy Remaining Copies of a Proof and Hold Job Quick Copy Dn amp User02 amp User03 2g User01 Sma OK AData01 doc 12031344 3Data02 doc 12031344 Select Select Deselect All Files All files in the Job Box are selected 2 User01 pad OK Data01 doc 12031344 3Data02 doc 12031344 Select 1 2 In the Job Box menu press A or V to select Quick Copy Press OK The Quick Copy screen appears listing the user names for stored jobs Press A or V to select the user name you entered in the printer driver Press OK The printer displays a list of the jobs stored under the selected user name Press A or V to scroll to the desired job title When Select Rig
232. n reappears 5 13 Document Box Searching Custom Boxes It is possible to search for a Custom Box using either the Box number or Box name Menu Search No om SOTE 0K0K0JS Menu File Del Time Search No EA OK 0001 1000 Searching with Box numbers Menu o Search No Search Name om Search No 0001 1000 0003 Menu o OK Searching with Box names Menu o Search No Search Name om 1 N N In the Custom Box list screen press Menu Left Select The Menu Screen appears Press or V to select Search No orSearch Name Press OK The Search No screen orthe Search Name Screen appears Searching is possible using the methods below Searching with Box numbers 5 14 Searching with Box names 5 14 In the Search No press Menu Left Select The Menu screen appears Press or V to select Search No Press OK The Search No screen appears Enter the Box number to be found and press OK A search is done for the Box number entered In the Search No press Menu Left Select The Menu Screen appears Press or V to select Search Name Document Box 3 Press OK The Search Name screen appears Search Name Smid OK Box0 3g ABC Menu Text 4 Enter the Box name to be found and press OK A search is
233. n the screens If you selected a folder there are 2 Detail screens Press lt or gt to move between the screens Pressing OK while file or folder details are displayed returns you to the Print File menu If the entire name shown as the File Name or Folder Name will not fit on one line pressing Detail Right Select changes toa 3 line name display If the name is 3 or more lines long you can scroll up or down by pressing A or V 4 23 Operation Panel Pressing OK twice while file or folder details are displayed returns Detail CI you to the Print File menu ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTU VWXYZabcdefghijklmnop qrstuvwxyz1234567890 Remove Memory Removing the USB memory Allows you to remove a USB memory device 1 Inthe USB Memory menu press A or V to select Remove Memory 2 Press OK The printer is now ready for the USB memory to be removed and the mode selection menu screen appears IMPORTANT If the screen on the left appears the USB memory is Cannot remove the still being used Wait until the relevant job e g printing from the USB memory while in use memory has ended and then repeat the Remove Memory procedure 4 24 Operation Panel Counter Viewing the counter value This only displays the total number of pages printed Counter Total A4 B5 pd ok 17000 2000 1000 1 2 3 You cannot change the displayed number Press MENU
234. ncryption Standard is a high level of encryption in which DES encryption is repeated threefold A hash symbol 34 appears to the right of the selected encryption method 4 4 After completing the selection press Complete Right Select SSL om The selected encryption method is set and the SSL menu reappears Off On Encryption Exit IPP over SSL SSL Server IPP over SSL setting IPP over SSL is an encryption function that uses SSL for communications between users and servers in network printing To use IPP over SSL both server and client must support the protocol The default setting is Of f 1 Inthe ssL Setting menu press A or V to select IPP over SSL 2 Press OK The IPP over SSL screen appears IPP over SSL D o1 Off 02 On 5 Press A or V to select whether IPP over SSL is enabled 4 Press OK The IPP over SSL setting is set and the SSL Setting menu reappears HTTPS SSL Server HTTPS setting HTTPS HyperText Transfer Protocol Secure is a protocol that adds SSL data encryption message authentication and a digital signature function to the HTTP protocol used for data transfer between WWW servers and clients S HTTP is a similar protocol but HTTPS differs in that it uses SSL The default setting is On 1 Inthe ssL Setting menu press A or V to select HTTPS 2 Press OK The HTTPS screen appears HTTPS paid OK Off 4 101 Op
235. nd Energy Saver The default setting is Energy Saver mode Quick Recovery Mode The recovery from the sleep mode is faster than when using Energy Saver mode The message display goes off when sleep mode is entered and the Ready indicator flashes The machine recovers quickly when OK is pressed The machine also automatically recovers and prints when a job is detected If print data is received during Sleep the print job is performed while the message display remains unlit To use the printer press OK The printer will be ready to use within 15 seconds FS 2100D FS 2100DN FS 4100DN 20 seconds FS 4200DN or 25 seconds FS 4300DN Note that ambient environmental conditions such as ventilation may cause the machine to respond more slowly For more information about configuring settings refer to Sleep Timer Sleep timer timeout time on page 4 90 Energy Saver Mode This mode reduces power consumption even more than quick recovery mode and allows Sleep mode to be set separately for each function IMPORTANT Cautions when setting the Energy Saver mode The data stored on the RAM disk is deleted when the machine goes into Energy Saver mode The machine will not recover from sleep mode if printing data is received from a computer via a USB cable FS 2100D will recover An ID card is not recognized when in Energy Saver mode To use the printer press OK The time required for the printer to wake up from sleep mode and r
236. ng IPSec IP Security Protocol is a security protocol adopted as the standard by the IETF for authentication and encryption in the third network layer IP layer It can be used with both IPv4 and IPv6 Press OK The AppleTalk screen appears Press A or V to select whether AppleTalk is enabled Press OK The AppleTalk setting is set and the Basic menu reappears Note IPv4 uses 32 bit IP addresses and IPv6 uses 128 bit IP addresses IPSec o3 Off 02 On om 1 3 4 LAN Interface LAN Interface setting Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used The default setting is Auto In the Basic menu press A or V to select IPSec Press OK The IPSec screen appears Press or V to select whether IPSec is enabled Press OK The IPSec setting is set and the Basic menu reappears Note LAN Interface is only displayed when the optional network interface kit IB 50 is installed Interface o Base Half o Base Full 1 In the Basic menu press A or V to select LAN Interface Press OK The LAN Interface screen appears The available LAN Interface are as follows Auto 10Base Half 10Base Full 100Base Half 100Base Full 1000Base T Press A or V to select the desired LAN Interface Press OK The LAN Interface is set and the Basic menu reappears Operation Panel MACAddressFilter MAC address filtering set
237. nsmission 1 Inthe TCP IP Settings menu press A or V to select IPv6 Setting 2 Press OK The IPv6 Setting menu screen appears IPv6 Setting Dn TCP IP IPv6 Exit The options available in the TCP IP IPv6 settings are as follows TCP IP IPv6 Enable disable TCP IP IPv6 4 59 RA Stateless RA Stateless setting 4 59 DHCPv6 DHCPV6 setting 4 59 IMPORTANT The RA Stateless and DHCPv6 menu options for TCP IP IPv6 are displayed when TCP IP IPv6 is enabled 4 58 Operation Panel TCP IP IPv6 Enable disable TCP IP IPv6 This specified whether TCP IP IPv6 is used TCP IP IPv6 Sma OK 01 Off 02 on RA Stateless RA Stateless setting The IPv6 router communicates transmits information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6 This information is the Router Advertisement RA In the IPv6 Setting menu press A or V to select TCP IP IPv6 Press OK The TCP IP IPv6 screen appears Press A or V to select whether TCP IP IPv6 is enabled Press OK The TCP IP IPv6 setting is set and the IPv6 Setting menu reappears ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol and is an IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 Internet Control Message Protocol ICMPv6 for the Internet Protocol Version 6 IPv6 Specification RA Stateless D 0j Off um DHCPv6 DHCPv6 setting 1
238. nt Set menu press A or V toselectAccount List 2 Press OK The Account List menu appears showing a list of Account List 3 the registered accounts in ascending order 200122 223485739 3 Press A or V to select an account to check or edit and then press o A 221228 Vm OK A list of selection options appears Detail Edit Delete Exit R 4 Press A or V to select Detail Edit and then press OK The Detail Edit Eua OK Detail Edit menu screen appears Print Restrict 4 124 Operation Panel Account ID 1228 4 Detail Edit D Account ID Print Restrict This account ID is already registered Print Restrict gt m o1 Off 2 Counter Limit Reject Usage Detail Edit paid OK Account ID Print Restrict Counter Limit Counter Limit 1 9999999 SRP REN pages om Detail Edit paid OK Account ID Print Restrict Counter Limit o To edit an account ID press A or V to select Account ID and then press OK The Account ID menu screen appears Use the numeric keys to enter the new account ID Press OK When account ID editing has been completed the Detail Edit menu screen appears This message appears if the account ID has already been registered To place printing restrictions on this account press A or V to select Print
239. nt system The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters Domain Restriction Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected The maximum length of the domain name is 32 characters Dynamic Domain Name System DDNS This printer supports DDNS through DHCP To use this system you have to set the DHCP BOOTP option to On first Set the DDNS to On to use the DDNS service to update the correspondence of the host names and IP addresses Refer to the Command Center RX User Guide for the method for setting this 2 18 Preparation before Use Lock Operation Panel Restricts the operation from the Operation Panel In order to operate locked menus it is necessary to be logged in as a user with Administrator authority The setting of Lock Operation Panel is done from Command Center RX For the method for the setting refer to the Command Center RX User Guide The operations restricted by Lock Operation Panel are as follows Lock Operation Panel settings dasalan AN Partial Partial Partial ve Lock1 Lock2 Lock3 System Menu Report Print e e USB Memory o Counter e Paper Settings o Print Settings o e e Network o o o o Optional Network o o o o e Device Common o e e Security o o o o e User Job Account e o eo o Adjust Maint e o o e Op Functions o o o eo e Document B
240. nted Labels Bond Recycled Vellum Rough Letterhead Color Prepunched Envelope Cardstock Thick High Quality and CUSTOM 1 to 8 Paper capacity 2 000 sheets 80 g m Noise Lwad FS 2100D FS 2100DN 70 dB A FS 4100DN 71 dB A FS 4200DN 72 dB A FS 4300DN 74 dB A At feeding the standard size paper Dimensions W PF 315 352 x 345 x 376 mm x D x H 13 7 8 x 13 5 8 x 14 7 8 PB 325 380 x 705 6 x 183 7 mm 15 x 27 3 4 x 7 3 4 Weight PF 315 7 7 kg or less 16 94 Ibs or less PB 325 6 5 kg or less 14 3 Ibs or less SSD HD 6 Option Item Description Capacity 32 GB Power supply From the machine A 27 Appendix Network Interface Kit IB 50 Option Item Description CPU SoC 88F6180 RAM 64 MBytes Flash ROM 16 MBytes Connectors 10BASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T Printer interface eKUIO 5 0V Operating system Network protocols IPv6 IPv4 Windows 2000 32bit XP 32bit 64bit Vista 32bit 64bit 7 32bit 64bit Server 2003 32bit 64bit Server 2008 32bit 64bit NetWare 3 x 4 x 5 x 6 x MacOS 9 x Mac OS X PowerPC Ver 10 3 x Ver 10 5 5 Intel Ver 10 4 4 Ver 10 6 x UNIX Apple Bonjour Compatible DHCPv6 DNSv6 FTP FTPS HTTP HTTPS ICMPv6 IKEv1 IPP IPPS Kerberos LDAP LPD POP3 RawPort SLP SMTP SNMP SNMPv1 v2c v3 SNTP ThinPrint Apple Bonjour Compatible BOOTP DHCP DNS FTP
241. nterface When connected by network interface card NIC block status is shown for an optional interface Memory This item shows Standard memory in the printer Option memory slot status in megabytes Total memory in the printer Current status of the RAM disk Emulation This item shows all available emulations of the printer The KPDL AUTO or PCL 6 emulation is set as the default when the printer is shipped from the factory The emulations are PCL6 4 13 Operation Panel KPDL Line Printer BM Proprinter EPSON LQ 850 8 Page Information This shows counter information Total printed page count and total page count of each paper size 9 Data Sanitization The status of the Data Sanitization implementation is displayed 10 Consumable Status This item shows the approximate level of remaining toner When the value is 100 the toner container is full The closer to 0 the smaller the amount of remaining toner Font List Printing a list of the printer s fonts To help you decide in selecting a font you can printout lists of the internal fonts or the optional fonts 1 Inthe Report Print menu press A or V to select Font List 2 Press OK A confirmation message is displayed fa Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set amp the screen for entering Job Accounting information is displayed Enter the Account ID and press OK 3 Press Yes Left Select The message Accepted
242. nu is displayed only when the HD 6 is installed on the printer Note Ifthe HD 6 is installed in the printer the Document Box will be available Formatting will destroy any existing amp data on a storage device including a used HD 6 Formatting of the HD 6 must be executed from the printer When the HD 6 has not yet been formatted the Attention indicator flashes and Format SSD is displayed Use the procedure below to format the HD 6 When a new HD 6 is inserted in the printer s slot Format SSD will appear on the message display 1 Inthe Device Common menu press A or V to select Format SSD 4 82 Operation Panel 2 Press OK A confirmation screen appears Format Are you sure SSD Yes ER i No 3 Press yes Left Select The Formatting screen appears and SSD formatting begins Once the formatting ends the standby screen reappears Pressing No Right Select returns to the Device Common menu without formatting the SSD Format SD Card Formatting the SD SDHC memory card The printer is equipped with a slot for an SD SDHC memory card For details about the handling of the SD SDHC memory card refer to Installing and Formatting the SD SDHC Memory Card on page A 9 Anew SD SDHC memory card must be formatted before it can be used in the printer Formatting allows data to be written to the SD SDHC memory card IMPORTANT Format SD Card is only displayed when an SD SDHC memory card is instal
243. oever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Original SSLeay License Copyright 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is cover
244. oftware as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 2 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement understand it and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party By opening this diskette package you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement vi Compliance and Conformity This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
245. ogin is displayed on the login screen and it is possible to log in by entering the Login User Name and Login Password using the numeric keys When Prohibit is set it is not possible to log in using the numeric keys 1 Inthe ID Card Settings menu press A or V to select Key Login 2 Press OK The Key Login screen appears Key Login lt 0 0 Permit 02 Prohibit CQ Press A or V to select Permit or Prohibit 4 Press OK The ID Card Settings menu reappears Password Login Password Login setting This sets whether or not to require the entry of a Login Password after authentication using an ID card When set to On the Login Password entry screen is displayed after the ID card is authenticated 1 Inthe 1D Card Settings menu press A or V to select Password Login a 2 Press OK The Password Login screen appears Password Login 9 Ok o1 Off 02 On 5 Press A or V to select Off or On 4 Press OK The ID Card Settings menu reappears 4 119 Operation Panel Job Account Set Job Account setting Job Accounting is a function that allows the number of pages used by each department to be managed through the use of entered account IDs To specify the Job Accounting settings it is necessary to log in with an administrator s Login User Name and Login Password For details of User Login Administration refer to User Login Set User login setting on page 4 109 Job accounting on this m
246. ollected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose MP Tray return it to its original package and reseal it SAFETY OF LASER BEAM USA 1 Safety of laser beam This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards established by the U S DHHS Department of Health and Human Services in 1968 This indicates that the product is safe to use during normal operation and maintenance The laser optical system enclosed in a protective housing and sealed within the external covers never permits the laser beam to escape 2 The CDRH Act A laser product related act was implemented on Aug 2 1976 by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration FDA This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U S without certification and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug 1 1976 The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States On this machine the label is on the inside
247. om Setup Exit ConnectionStatus 0 Status 1 2 Connection 1 2 1 2 Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK The login screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login Password is Admin For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Pressing Login Right Select If the entered Login User Name and Login Password are correct the Optional Network menu appears showing a list of available options Wireless Network Wireless network settings Note Wireless Network is only displayed when the optional wireless network interface kit IB 51 is installed Inthe Optional Network menu press A or V toselectWireless Network Press OK The Wireless Network menu screen appears The following operations are possible ConnectionStatus Wireless network connection status check 4 63 Quick Setup Quick setup for the wireless network 4 64 Custom Setup Detailed settings for the wireless network 4 66 ConnectionStatus Wireless network connection status check When the optional wireless network interface kit IB 51 is installed you can check the status of the wireless network In the Wireless Network menu press A or V to select ConnectionStatus Press OK The ConnectionStatus screen appears 4 63 Operation Panel o
248. omatic delete settings and select the storage media The following items are available in the Job Box setting Quick Copy Jobs Changing the Maximum Number of Quick Copy jobs 5 32 JobRet Deletion Set Automatic Delete times for Temporary Jobs 5 32 Storage Media Selecting the storage media for the jobs 5 33 Quick Copy Jobs Changing the Maximum Number of Quick Copy jobs This changes maximum number of Quick Copy jobs to a value between 0 and 300 The default is 32 Job Box Setting JobRet Deletion Storage Media Exit om Quick Copy Jobs MG O 300 EH jov s 1 Inthe Job Box menu press A or V to select Job Box Setting 2 Press OK The Job Box Setting screen appears 3 Press A or V to select Quick Copy Jobs and press OK The Quick Copy Jobs screen appears 4 Use the numeric keys or A or V to set the maximum number of Quick Copy jobs 5 Press OK The setting is stored and the Job Box Setting menu reappears JobRet Deletion Set Automatic Delete times for Temporary Jobs When the set period passes the temporary jobs are automatically deleted Job Box Setting JobRet Deletion Storage Media Exit om 1 Inthe Job Box menu press A or V to select Job Box Setting 2 Press OK The Job Box Setting screen appears 3 Press or V to select JobRet Deletion and press OK The JobRet Deletion screen appears
249. ommand operation Remove the write protection using the command 04 No disk space Purge unnecessary files or increase the RAM disk size For more information refer to RAM Disk Size RAM disk size setting on page 4 82 05 The desired file does not exist in the RAM disk Stored the file in the RAM disk 10 The file stored in the RAM disk is write protected using command operation Remove the write protection using the command Registered numbers exceeded Cannot add There are already 100 accounts registered so it is not possible to register any new accounts Replace MK Replace Maintenance Kit which is displayed on the message display Replacement of the maintenance kit is necessary at every 500 000 images of printing or every 300 000 images on FS 2100D FS 2100DN and requires professional servicing Replace the toner Toner has run out in the toner container Replace the toner container using a new toner kit The printer does not operate when this message is displayed Restricted by Job Accounting Press OK This message is displayed when printing was attempted despite the Job Account function being on with Restriction applied as the job limit for each job account To return the printer to the print ready status press OK For more information refer to Job Account Set Job Account setting on page 4 120 8 14 Troubleshooting Message Corrective
250. on Image files are printed at the resolution specified in the resolution information Images with no resolution information are printed using the Paper Size setting Print Resolution Images are printed using a 1 to 1 correspondence between the image file pixels and printed dots For example the printed size of a 600 x 300 pixel image file is 1 inch x 1 2 inch Press A or V to select whether TIFF JPEG Size mode is enabled Press OK The TIFF JPEG Size setting is set and the Page Setting menu reappears Note Images are automatically rotated during printing to amp provide a closer match between the aspect ratios of the image file and the paper used for printing 4 52 Operation Panel User Name The User Name display settings Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select User Name i 2 Press OK The User Name screen appears User Name pai OK Off 02 On 3 Press A or V to select On or Of f 4 Press OK The User Name setting is set andthe Print Settings menu reappears Job Name The Job Name display settings Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Job Name R 2 Press OK The Job Name screen appears Job Name o gt Off o Press A or V to select On or Off 4 Press OK The Job Name setting is s
251. opes 5 envelopes may be loaded in the multi purpose tray Acceptable envelope sizes are as follows Acceptable Envelope Size Youkei 2 114 x 162 mm Youkei 4 105 x 235 mm Monarch 3 7 8 x 7 1 2 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm Executive 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 3 7 8 x 8 7 8 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 3 5 8 x 6 1 2 Switching to Envelop Mode FS 2100D FS 2100DN To print on an envelope follow the procedure below to switch to envelope mode Note When the printing on envelopes is completed return the envelope switch to its original position at the FI bottom 1 Envelope Switch Open the rear cover To print on an envelope raise the envelope switch CAUTION The fuser unit inside the printer is hot Do not touch it with your hands as it may result in burn injury 2 27 Preparation before Use 3 Close the rear cover Loading Envelopes into the MP Multi Purpose Tray 1 Fan the envelopes then tap it on a level surface to avoid envelope jams or skewed printing 2 Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops 3 Pull out the support tray section of the MP tray 2 28 Preparation before Use Zz 1 4 Adjust the position of the paper width guides on the MP tray P aic A61 STMTI B5 aal zii A5 LTR LGL 5 Align the paper with t
252. optional SSD HD 6 and sanitizing the stored data SSD Initializ SSD Initialization setting 4 106 DataSanitization Sanitizing the stored data 4 108 Note SSD Initializ is displayed only when the optional Data Security Kit is installed on the printer 1 Inthe security menu press A or V to select Data Security 2 Press OK The Data Security menu screen appears Data Security Dn SSD Initializ DataSanitization Exit SSD Initializ SSD Initialization setting This is to change the Security Password and initialize on optional SSD HD 6 SecurityPassword Change the Security Password 4 107 Initialization Initialize on optional SSD 4 107 1 Inthe Data Security menu press A or V to select SSD Initializ 2 Press OK The SecurityPassword entry screen appears SecurityPassword gt 4 ABC Text 3 Enter the Security Password using the numeric keys Note The initial setting for the Security Password is 000000 For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Sa A 4 Press OK If the Security Password entered is correct the SSD SSD Initializ lt m Initializ menu screen appears If the Security Password Security Passwd entered was not correct Incorrect password is displayed and Initialization the SecurityPassword screen reappears Enter the correct Security Password Exit 4 106
253. or V to select the desired paper size Note When Custom is selected it is possible to enter the SJ paper size For details refer to Custom PaperSize Setting a Custom Paper Size on page 4 31 6 Press OK The paper size for the cassette is set and the Cassette Set menu screen reappears If you selected Custom in step 4 use the procedure below to specify the paper length and width Custom PaperSize Setting a Custom Paper Size In the procedure below select the units to be used for entering the custom paper size and then enter the paper width and length As shown in the figure enter the Y and X values for the paper size using the selected units Cassette FS 2100D FS 2100DN 210 to 356 mm 8 25 to 14 02 inches Cassette FS 4100DN FS 4200DN FS 4300DN 148 to 356 mm 5 83 to 14 02 inches Paper Feeder PF 320 X Dimension 162 to 356 mm 6 38 to 14 02 inches c 9 2 c co E a Cassette FS 2100D FS 2100DN 140 to 216 mm 5 5 to 8 5 inches Cassette FS 4100DN FS 4200DN FS 4300DN 105 to 216 mm 4 13 to 8 5 inches Paper Feeder PF 320 92 to 216 mm 3 62 to 8 5 inches 4 31 Operation Panel Cassette 1 Set gt m Other Paper Size Custom PaperSize Exit Custom PaperSize MG Measurement Size Entry Y Size Entry X Exit Measurement Dn 52 mm Size Entry Y U 5 83 14 02 14 02 Size
254. or flip the paper stack over The printer may have problems if paper jams recur after the paper is replaced Whether or not the jammed pages are reproduced normally after printing is resumed depends on the location of the paper jam Utilizing Online Help Messages When Paper Jam is displayed press Help Left Select to display the procedure to clear the jam Press V to display the next step or press A to display the previous step Press OK to exit the online help message display MP Tray Paper is jammed at the MP tray Remove the jammed paper using the procedure given below 1 Remove the paper jammed at the MP tray IMPORTANT Before clearing the jammed paper remove the paper on the MP tray 2 Open and close the top cover to clear the error 8 19 Troubleshooting Paper Cassette Paper Feeder 1 Pull out the cassette or optional paper feeder 2 Remove any partially fed paper Note Check to see if paper is loaded correctly If not reload N the paper 3 Push the cassette back in securely The printer warms up and resumes printing 8 20 Troubleshooting Duplex Unit Paper is jammed in the duplex section Remove the jammed paper using the procedure given below 1 Pull the cassette all the way out of the printer 2 Open the duplex front cover and remove any jammed paper W VLAN
255. ot been deleted or moved Format SD card The SD SDHC Memory Card inserted in the printer is not formatted and therefore cannot be read or written To format an SD SDHC Memory Card follow the procedure in Format SD Card Formatting the SD SDHC memory card on page 4 83 8 9 Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action Format SSD The SSD HD 6 inserted in the printer is not formatted and therefore cannot be read or written To format an SSD follow the procedure in Format SSD Formatting the SSD on page 4 82 Fuser unit is not installed The fuser unit is either not installed or incorrectly inserted Insert the fuser unit securely Contact your Service Representative Incorrect account ID The Account ID does not match Check the registered Account ID For more information refer to Job Account Set Job Account setting on page 4 120 Press OK Incorrect account ID This message is displayed when the Job Accounting function is enabled and no account is set for a transmitted print job or the specified account is not registered the incorrect account is set To return the printer to the print ready status press OK For more information refer to Job Account Set Job Account setting on page 4 120 Incorrect ID The user ID entered for a private job is not correct Check the user ID that you s
256. oubleshooting issus km dn 8 1 print quality problems lille 8 3 U Uninstalling Software llle 2 16 USB Interface genea iia iaia ee 1 4 USB Keyboard cee he eee seen A 12 USB KeyboardType 0 0 cee eee eee 4 94 USB Memo esas ixi drKRSReCREE RE EE A 11 Print PPM NAN TA AN a Ug 4 17 REMOVE EC ace NAG NB NAN DADAP NG 4 24 USB Memory Slot 0 0 0 0 c eee eee 1 2 USB POM s ettet cues aie a ten nae ke weet 1 4 Index 3 User login setting llle 4 109 User Mame osos ea wake RA E E Re Pa E hen 4 53 W Waste Toner Box 2 2 cece eee 1 2 Replacing iiem mmn Ren Ren m aye A 7 6 Wide AM obicere RE PEE Gaga nab Naga k 4 51 Wireless Network Interface Kit A 10 X XPS Fit to Page 1 eee 4 52 Index 4 QUALITY CERTIFICATE Tiis machine kas passed all quality controls and final insoeczion EL KYOCERA Document Solutions America Inc Headquarters 225 Sand Road Fairfield New Jersey 07004 0008 USA Phone 1 973 808 8444 Fax 1 973 882 6000 Latin America 8240 NW 52nd Terrace Dawson Building Suite 100 Miami Florida 33166 USA Phone 1 305 421 6640 Fax 1 305 421 6666 KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada Ltd 6120 Kestrel Rd Mississauga ON L5T 1S8 Canada Phone 1 905 670 4425 Fax 1 905 670 8116 KYOCERA Document Solutions Mexico S A de C V Calle Arquimedes No 130 4 Piso Colonia Polanco Chapu
257. ox Custom Box e e amp e Job Box e o e Operation Panel key operation oe on it is necessary to log in as a user with Administrator authority to operate this No restrictions 1 Regardless of the Lock Operation Panel setting it is necessary to be logged in as a user with Administrator authority 2 The addition and editing of Custom Box are restricted 3 Job Box Setting is restricted O 4 Only Logout and operation for canceling printing are effective O 5 Only Logout and Cancel for stopping the buzzer are effective Note Optional Network is only displayed when a network interface kit IB 50 or wireless network interface kit IB 51 is installed as an option 2 19 Preparation before Use Power On Off Power On IMPORTANT When turning off the power switch do not turn on the power switch again immediately Wait more than 5 seconds and then turn on the power switch Power Off Make sure that the Data 1 Make sure that the Data indicator is off then press the Power switch indicator is off 2 20 Preparation before Use Energy Saver Function Sleep When the set time factory setting is 1 minute elapses after the printer is last used the printer automatically enters sleep mode The message display backlight and lights turn off to minimize power consumption This status is referred to as Sleep There are two sleep modes Quick Recovery a
258. p if possible when you install the memory modules Always hold the main controller board or a memory module by its edges as shown below to avoid damaging electronic parts Installing the Memory Modules 1 Power off the printer and unplug the printer power cord 2 Open the rear cover and remove the interface cover and power cord connector cover A 6 Appendix 3 Unscrew five screws at the back of the main controller board 4 Pull out the main controller board gently 5 Remove the memory module from its package Aligning the cutouts of the memory module with the matching keys of the socket carefully plug the memory module into the memory socket until it clicks in place A CAUTION Do not plug the memory module backwards Push down the memory module to secure 7 After you finish installing the memory modules reinstall the main controller board and fasten it with screws Removing a Memory Module To remove a memory module remove the main controller board then carefully push out the two socket clamps Ease the memory module out of the socket to remove A 7 Appendix Checking Expansion Memory After installing expansion memory use the following method to check that it is correctly installed 1 Inthe Report Print menu press A or V to select Status Page 2 Press OK A confirmation message is displayed 3 Press Yes Left Select Accepted appears and the printer Print prints
259. pears The options available in the TCP IP IPv4 settings are as follows DHCP DHCP setting 4 55 Auto IP Auto IP setting 4 55 IP Address IP address setting 4 56 Subnet Mask Subnet mask setting 4 56 Default Gateway Gateway setting 4 57 Bonjour Bonjour setting 4 58 IMPORTANT The DHCP Auto IP IP address subnet mask default gateway and Bonjour menu options for TCP IP IPv4 settings are displayed when TCP IP is enabled DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is the protocol that assigns the information required to establish a network connection when a host attempts to connect to the network Internet This information includes the IP address of the local node and the default router the router in the host s own network system and the DNS Domain Name System server DHCP is an extension of the BOOTP Bootstrap startup protocol DHCP otn Ger ma Auto IP Auto IP setting 1 2 Inthe IPv4 Setting menu press A or V to select DHCP Press OK The DHCP screen appears Press A or V to select whether DHCP is enabled Press OK The DHCP setting is set and the IPv4 Setting menu reappears This protocol is used for automatic assignment of an IP address when you connect to a small network that does not have a DHCP server Select an address from the range 169 254 0 1 to 169 254 255 254 and if no other device on the network is using that address it is used as your address
260. pecified on the printer driver Incorrect login user name or password The NTLM server rejected the authentication Enter the correct Login User Name or Password Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action Incorrect login user name or password Job is canceled Enter the correct Login User Name or Login Password Incorrect password Enter the correct password Job Accounting Press OK restriction exceeded This message is displayed when the Job Accounting function is enabled and an attempt has been made to exceed the print limit set for each account To return the printer to the print ready status press OK For more information refer to Job Account Set Job Account setting on page 4 120 Job not stored Press OK Printing using the Custom Box and Job Box function failed because there was insufficient space available on the SSD RAM disk or SD SDHC Memory Card or because the RAM disk was disabled when demounting the SSD To print an error report and return the printer to the print ready status press OK KPDL error Press OK Current print processing cannot continue because of occurrence of KPDL error To print out an error report display KPDL Error Rpt from the menu system and select On Press OK to resume printing You can abandon printing by pressing Cancel If Auto Error Clear is s
261. quality MC This sets the output of the main charger When print quality has deteriorated the 1 5 output of the main charger can be changed to restore print quality Note This menu only appears when Altitude Adj is set to Normal 4 129 Operation Panel Op Functions Optional application settings You can use the optional applications installed on this machine Application The applications listed below are installed on this machine You can use these applications for a limited period on a trial basis DATA SECURITY Data Security Kit E ID Card Card Authentication Kit B UG 33 ThinPrint Note Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending SV on the application The options available in Op Functions menu are as follows Starting Application Use 4 130 Checking Application Details 4 132 Starting Application Use Use the procedure below to start using an application 1 Press Menu 2 Press or V to select Op Functions x 3 Press OK The Login screen appears Login User Name EE Sea esl Note When user login administration is set Login Password e When logged in as an administrator the log in Screen is not displayed and the Op Functions menu screen is displayed The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other than an administrator Log in again as an administrator Login
262. r refer to the section on Command Center RX on page 2 17 1 Inthe copies menu or the Paper Source menu press a Az Function pang OK Function Right Select The Function menu appears Duplex EcoPrint File Name Entry 2 Press A or V to select JobFinish Notice 3 Press OK The JobFinish Notice screen appears JobFinish Notice NG 01 O f f 02 On 4 Press or V to select On 5 Press OK The Address Entry screen appears Address Entry En Text 6 Enter the address to be notified Note Up to 128 characters can be entered For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 When user login administration is enabled the address of the logged in user is entered 7 Press OK Register the address and the Function menu reappears Encrypted PDF Entering the PDF password The password of a PDF file can be entered 1 Inthe Copies menu or the Paper Source menu press Function pang OK Function Right Select The Function menu appears EcoPrint File Name Entry 2 Press A or V to select Encrypted PDF 4 21 Operation Panel Password Text 3 4 Press OK The Password entry screen appears Enter the password for the PDF file Note Up to 256 characters can be entered For details on amp entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 5
263. r select the media type by referring to SJ Media Type Paper type setting for the MP tray on page 4 27 1 Fan the media paper transparencies then tap it on a level surface to avoid media jams or skewed printing 2 Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops 2 25 Preparation before Use 3 Pull out the support tray section of the MP tray Support Tray Section of the MP Tray 4 Adjust the position of the paper guides on the MP tray Standard paper sizes are marked on the MP tray For standard paper sizes slide the paper width guides to the corresponding mark 5 Align the paper with the paper guides and insert as far as it will go IMPORTANT Do notload more paper than will fit under the load limits on the inside of the MP tray Keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up Curled paper must be uncurled before use Straighten the top edge if it is curled When loading paper into the multi purpose tray check that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more first remove the left over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray 6 Set the MP tray paper size on the printer s operation panel Refer to MP Tray Set MP tray settings on page 4 26 2 26 Preparation before Use Loading Envel
264. r Driver Settings on page 3 6 Media Type Paper Weight Media Type Paper Weight Plain Normal 2 Letterhead Normal 3 Transparency Extra Heavy Color Normal 3 Preprinted Normal 2 Prepunched Normal 2 Labels Heavy 1 Envelope Heavy 3 Bond Normal 3 Cardstock Heavy 3 Recycled Normal 2 Thick Heavy 3 Vellum Light HighQuality Normal 2 Rough Normal 3 CUSTOM 1 to 8 Normal 2 Use the procedure below to set the paper weight For the procedure for setting weights for custom paper CUSTOM 1 to 8 refer to Custom Paper Settings on page 4 36 4 35 Operation Panel 1 Inthe Paper Settings menu press A or V to select Media Type Set 2 Press OK The Media Type Set screen appears listing the Media Type Set Vm media types that can used with the printer Plain Transparency Preprinted Exit 3 Press or V to select the media type for which you want to set the paper weight 4 Press OK A menu for the selected media is displayed Plain Ema OK Paper Weight Exit o Press A or V to select Paper Weight 6 Press OK The Paper weight screen appears listing the paper Paper Weight oU weights that can used with the printer Heavy 1 0 Normal 3 6 Normal 2 N Press A or V to select the desired paper weight 8 Press OK The paper weight is set and the Media Type Set screen reappears Custom Paper Settings This setting specifies the p
265. r Entry Method on page A 2 8 Press OK Register the name to display and the renamed custom paper screen reappears Reset Type Adj Resets customized settings This resets all the settings specified in Media Type Set Paper type settings on page 4 35 1 Inthe Paper Settings menu press A or V to select Reset Type Adj 2 Press OK A confirmation screen appears Reset Type Adjust Are you sure Yes j No 3 Press Yes Left Select The message Completed appears and the Paper Settings menu reappears Pressing No Right Select returns to the Paper Settings menu without resetting the customized settings 4 38 Operation Panel Print Settings These settings specify the following printing parameters paper feed source paper feed mode duplex printing override A4 LTR emulation mode print quality and setting pagination The options available in Print Settings are as follows Paper Source Selecting the paper feed source 4 39 MP Tray Priority the settings for priority paper feed from the MP tray 4 39 Paper Feed Mode Setting the paper feed source 4 40 Duplex Setting the duplex printing 4 41 Paper Output Selecting the output stack 4 42 Override A4 LTR Overriding difference between A4 and Letter 4 42 Emulation Setting the emulation 4 43 Font Selecting the default font 4 45 Code Set Setting the code set 4 47 Print Quality Setting print quality 4
266. r Entry screen appears Box Number Entry NG 0001 1000 0003 4 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to enter the Box Number Note Enter the Box Number as a four digit number from 0001 JI 1000 5 Press OK Box03 Kma OK Exit Detail 6 Press or V to select Detail or Exit then press OK 5 5 Document Box To set the details of the Box select Detail and proceed to Detailed box settings on page 5 6 If the details of the Box will not be set then select Exit and finish the operation Detailed box settings Set the details of the Box when necessary The items to set are different between when user login administration is not enabled when user login administration is enabled and the user is logged in with administrator authority and when user login administration is enabled and the user is logged in with user authority Detail Ln Box Name 1 9 Box03 Edit The detailed settings for the Box are as shown below User login On Setting User login Off Reference Page Administrator User Box Name Yes Yes Yes Box Name Change the Box name 5 7 Owner Yes No Owner Owner settings 5 7 Permission Yes Yes Permission settings for the sharing of a Box 5 8 Box Password Yes Yes Yes Box Password Box password setting 5 8 Box Number Yes Yes Yes Box number Change of the Box number 5 9 Usage Restrict Yes Yes No Usa
267. r a paper jam occurs during printing The default setting is On 1 Inthe Buzzer menu screen press A or V to select Error 2 Press OK The Error screen appears Error Kad OK Off FONA 3 Press A or V to select whether the warning tone is enabled 4 Press OK The warning tone setting is set and the Buzzer menu reappears Keyboard Confirm Keyboard confirmation tone setting When On is selected in this setting a tone sounds each time a USB keyboard is used The default setting is Of f 1 Inthe Buzzer menu screen press A or V to select Keyboard Confirm 2 Press OK The Keyboard Confirm screen appears Keyboard Confirm n Moff 02 On 3 Press A or V to select whether the keyboard confirmation tone is enabled 4 80 Operation Panel 4 Press OK The Keyboard Confirm tone setting is set and the Buzzer menu reappears RAM Disk Setting Using the RAM disk The RAM disk is a memory space shared within the printer memory that can temporarily store print jobs The stored print job can then be used to print multiple copies of the job reducing the total amount of time required to print the whole job It acts similar to the SSD except that the data is effective only when the printer is powered up To use the RAM disk activate and enter the desired size of the RAM disk in the manner described below The maximum RAM disk size can be calculated as follows When the RAM
268. rd Authentication Kit USB Interface Connector Interface Cover Power Cord Connector Cover Fuser Cover Rear Cover Power Cord Connector Envelope Switch Supported on FS 2100D FS 2100DN 1 4 Machine Parts Operation Panel 40 41 42 43 44 45 37 Ready Indicator 38 Data Indicator 39 Attention Indicator 40 Message Display 41 Left Select Key 42 Logout Key 43 Menu Key 44 Back Key 45 Numeric Keys 46 Right Select Key 47 Cancel Key 48 Arrow Keys 49 OK Key 50 Clear Key 51 Document Box Key 37 38 39 O Ready Data Attention 1 5 47 Machine Parts 2 Preparation before Use This chapter contains explanations on the following topics Changing Network Interface PararriQters isis iiss csesasiasassuissncsesnssessesasisisasansasnsisdadseasnandnsanistvasadisaeaanaaian 2 2 Printing niil cus aaa GAPANG BIKINI 2 6 NATING SoftWare KAGABE 2 7 Ka AA AA AA 2 13 Uninstalling Software Windows PC uiui kaaa na a aaasa MiA0E ERE EE RP ea LER Ru KNA nanba iamini andaina idan nw 2 16 Command Center ROX BANAAG 2 17 x 450 2 A Y HO O 2 20 Energy Saver PUNENON me 2 21 Loading Papet AA AA AA APA AA AA 2 22 2 1 Preparation before Use Changing Networ
269. reen appears 3 Press or V to select Network User Note If the owner will not be set then select None and press FI OK 4 Press OK The Login User Name screen appears Document Box 5 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys Note Up to 64 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 for details on entering characters 6 Press OK The Detail menu screen reappears Permission settings for the sharing of a Box When user login administration is enabled this setting determines whether or not a Box will be shared with other users 1 Inthe Detail menu screen press lt or gt to select Permission Detail on Permission 3 9 Shared Change 2 Press Change Right Select The Permission screen Permission D a ppears 0 Shared 02 Private 5 Press A or V to select Shared or Private 4 Press OK The Detail menu screen reappears Box Password Box password setting It is possible to set a password for a box and restrict the users who have access to it Enter one if necessary Note This setting is not displayed when user login administration is enabled and the Permission settings for the amp sharing of a Box on page 5 8 has been set to Private 1 Inthe Detail menu screen press lt or gt to select Box Password Detail otn Box Password 4 9 600660060000 Edit T 2 Press Edit Right Se
270. reen appears Printed Pages 0J Counter Reset 4 Press Aor V to select Printed Pages 5 Press OK The Printed Pages menu list screen appears Printed Pages CI Total 300000 Combine None 200000 Combine 2in1 100000 4 122 Operation Panel 6 Press A or V to check the required counter display 7 Press OK The Printed Pages Counter Reset menu screen reappears Each Job Account Counter Reset Totals reset by account Resets the number of pages printed for each of the accounts currently set Note Before carrying out this operation register the Account in the Account List Account List operation on page FI 4 123 1 Inthe Job Account Set menu press A or V to select Each Job Account 2 Press OK The Each Job Account menu appears with the Each Job Account 40 accounts with the highest numbers listed first 00923022 8912345678 3 Press A or V to select an account and then press OK The o A 22341736 lt m Printed Pages Counter Reset menu screen appears 0 Printed Pages BJE Q O G i ct 0 K D n oO ct A Press A or V to select Counter Reset 5 Press OK The reset confirmation menu screen appears Reset counter To proceed with resetting the counter press Yes Left Select Are you sure ma Pa 301736 Completed appears the counter is reset and the Printed el Pages Counter Reset menu reappears Pressin
271. ress OK The Preshared Key screen appears Preshared Key lt 0 06600600000 Edit 3 Press Edit Right Select The Preshared Key entry screen Preshared Key 9 OK appears 000000000 ABC Text 4 Enter the Preshared Key using the numeric keys Note The number of characters is between 8 and 64 For SJ details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 5 Press OK The Encryption menu reappears Basic Basic settings for the optional network interface kit This selects the basic settings for the optional network interface kit IB 50 or optional wireless network interface kit IB 51 network 1 Inthe optional Network menu press A or V to select Basic 2 Press OK The Basic menu screen appears Basic paid OK TCP IP Settings The following operations are possible TCP IP Settings TCP IP Settings for the optional network interface aa kit 4 69 AppleTalk Netware NetWare setting 4 70 Exit AppleTalk AppleTalk setting 4 70 PSec IPSec setting 4 71 LAN Interface LAN Interface setting 4 71 e MACAddressFilter MAC address filtering setting 4 72 Restart Network Restarting the optional network interface kit 4 72V TCP IP Settings TCP IP Settings for the optional network interface kit This selects the TCP IP settings The options available in the TCP IP Settings are as follows TCP IP Enable Disabl
272. ressing Detail Right Select changes to a 3 line name ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU display VWXYZabcdefghijklmnop qrstuvwxyz1234567890 USB Keyboard When a USB keyboard is attached it is possible to check whether the USB keyboard can be used 1 Inthe status menu press A or V to select USB Keyboard 2 Press OK If the USB keyboard is available for use Available is USB Keyboard CO displayed Available Wireless Network When the optional wireless network interface kit is installed it is possible to check the status of the wireless network Note Wireless Network is only displayed when the optional wireless network interface kit is installed 1 inthe status menu press A or V to select Wireless network Press OK The status of the wireless network is displayed Wireless network 0 Status 1 2 Connection 3 Press lor gt The NetwkName SSID is displayed Wireless network NG NetwkName SSID 2 2 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST Detail If the entire name shown as the NetwkName SSID will not fit on one Detail OK line pressing Detail Right Select changes to a 3 line name ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU display VWXYZabcdefghijklmnop qrstuvwxyz1234567890 6 5 Status Menu 7 Maintenance This chapter contains explanations on the following topics Toner Container Replacement
273. ricity and there is no drive noise Status page This lists machine conditions such as the machine s memory the total number of prints and paper source settings You can print the status page from the operation panel Subnet Mask The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0 The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of the network address The term prefix refers to something added to the beginning and in this context indicates the first section of the IP address When an IP address is written the length of the network address can indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash For example 24 in the address 133 210 2 0 24 In this way 133 210 2 0 24 denotes the IP address 133 210 2 0 with a 24 bit prefix network section This new network address section originally part of the host address made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address When you enter the subnet mask be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off Glossary 3 Glossary TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other over a network TCP IP IPv6 TCP IP IPv6 is based on the current Internet protocol TCP IP IPv4 IPv6 is the next generation Internet protocol
274. rmat is set and the Date Setting menu reappears Inthe Date Setting menu press A or V to select Time Zone Press OK The Time Zone screen appears Press A or V to select the location Press OK The time zone is set and the Date Setting menu reappears Note If you select a region that does not utilize summer time the Ss summer time setting will not appear Inthe Date Setting menu press A or V to select Summer Time Press OK The Summer Time screen appears Press or V to select whether the summer time is enabled Press OK The summer time is set and the Date Setting menu reappears 4 78 Operation Panel Buzzer Alarm Buzzer setting This function uses tones to notify the user of printer operations and the printer status This setting is useful for example when the printer is located some distance from the user The options available in Buzzer are as follows Key Confirmation Key confirmation tone setting 4 79 Job Finish Job completed tone setting 4 79 Ready Preparation completed tone setting 4 80 Error Error tone setting 4 80 Keyboard Confirm Keyboard confirmation tone setting 4 80 1 Inthe Device Common menu press A or V to select Buzzer 2 Press OK The Buzzer screen appears Buzzer paid OK Job Finish Ready Exit Key Confirmation Key confirmation tone setting When on is selected in this setting a tone sounds each time a key is use
275. rmware You can get the source code and you are permitted to copy redistribute and modify it under the terms of GPL LGPL For further information including availability of the source code visit http www kyoceradocumentsolutions com gpl Open SSL License Copyright 1998 2006 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whats
276. rrupteurs de fonctionnement ils ne mettent pas l appareil hors tension WARNING This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help The use of a non shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited CAUTION The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS Gen of IC Rules
277. rs showing the available paper feed options Press A or V to select the desired paper feed mode Press OK The paper feed mode is set and the Print Settings menu reappears When the Paper Runs Out During Printing When Paper Feed Mode is setto Fixed if the paper in the cassette runs out during printing Load paper in cassette 1 is displayed and the printer stands by In this event either replenish the paper in the empty cassette or use the procedure below to print from another paper source Alternative tm A4 Preprint B5 Plain re ro 1 While Load paper in cassette 1 is displayed press A1t Left Select The A1ternative menu screen appears 2 Press or V to select the desired paper feed source and paper size 3 Press OK Printing continues 4 40 Operation Panel Duplex Setting the duplex printing Using the duplexer you can automatically print on both sides of the paper Duplex printing is available for the following paper media types Plain Preprinted Bond Recycled Rough Letterhead Color Prepunched High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Note Duplex printing can be also performed from the MP tray If the paper to be fed from the MP tray does not SJ match the paper size and paper type of the current paper feed source cassette a paper jam may occur When Custon is specified duplex printing can be set For details refer to Custom Paper Settings on page 4 36 Binding Mode
278. s nam You cannot copy Copying is not possible because data with the same file name exists at the destination Delete the data with the same file name at the destination before copying The user name is not registered The login user name entered is not registered Check the login user name This account ID is already registered The account ID set has already been registered Register a different account ID This login user name already registered The changed login user name has already been registered Set a different login user name 8 15 Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action Toner is running out The toner has run low Ensure that a new toner container is available without delay For details refer to Toner Container Replacement on page 7 2 Top tray is full of paper Remove the paper The top tray has become full approx 250 FS 2100D and FS 2100DN or 500 FS 4100DN FS 4200DN and FS 4300DN pages You must remove all printed pages from the top tray When the printer detects that the top tray is empty again the printer will continues printing into the top tray Unknown toner installed PC This message is displayed if the installed toner container s regional specification does not match the machine s Install the specified toner container USB memory error Press OK tit
279. s Binding refers to the manner in which printed pages of paper are joined together by gluing stitching etc in book form The two possible types of binding are Bind Long Edge in which pages are joined together along their long edge and Bind Short Edge in which they are joined together along their short edge In selecting a binding type you must also consider the orientation of the printed page You can use Bind Long Edge or Bind Short Edge with either landscape or portrait printing Depending on the binding type and print orientation the duplexer provides four types of binding These are 1 portrait Bind Long Edge 2 portrait Bind Short Edge 3 landscape Bind Long Edge and 4 landscape Bind Short Edge The figure below shows these binding methods 1 2 2 Portrait Bind Short Edge Portrait Bind Long Edge 3 13 Landscape 5 Bind Short Edge g Landscape 4 Bind Long Edge pa J 5 3 2 In the Print Settings menu press A or V to select Duplex Press OK The Duplex screen appears showing the list of available Duplex pag OK duplex printing modes fol oft Bind Long Edge Bind Short Edge 3 Press A or V to select the desired duplex printing mode The message display toggles through the following Off default 4 41 Operation Panel Bind Long Edge Bind Short Edge Selecting of f disables duplex printing Press OK The duplex pr
280. s OK The TCP IP setting is set and the TCP IP Settings TCP IP Settings 0m menu reappears IPv4 Settin IPv6 Settin Exit Switching DHCP to Off or On Select On when using a DHCP server to automatically obtain an IP Address Select Of f to enter an IP Address 9 Press or V to select IPv4 Setting 10 Press OK The IPv4 Setting menu screen appears IPv4 Setting pai OK Auto IP IP Address Exit 11 Press A or V to select DHCP 12 Press OK The DHCP screen appears DHCP om 0 Off 13 Press A or V to select Off or On Preparation before Use IPv4 Setting Auto IP IP Address om DHCP Exit Entering the IP address 14 Press OK The DHCP setting is set and the IPv4 Setting menu reappears Note DHCP becomes effective when On is selected Press Menu to end the mode selection menu When off is set continue on to enter the IP Address If DHCP is set to Off enter the IP Address manually DHCP Auto IP IP Address Exit IP Address D MMM o o o IPv4 Setting Dn Entering the Subnet Mask 15 Press or V to select IP Address 16 Press OK The 1P Address screen appears 17 Use the numeric keys or A or V to set the IP address You can set any value between 000 and 255 Increase or reduce the figures by pressing A or V Use lt and gt to mov
281. s can be changed By selecting frequently used settings you can omit steps when printing The procedure is as follows 1 Click start and then click Devices and Printers Right click the printer driver icon of the machine and click Properties menu of the printer driver 3 Click Printing Preferences on the General tab 4 Select the default settings and click OK For the settings refer to Printer driver print settings screen on page 3 3 Printing Printing functions This section explains the useful functions which can be set with the Printer Driver For more information refer to the Printer Driver User Guide Half Speed Mode Printer Driver Settings Half speed mode reduces the print speed to half the rated speed When selected the toner adheres better when printing on small size thick or textured paper In addition you can select the half speed mode to feed thick paper smoothly and avoid the paper jam This mode may result in quieter printing Note Half speed mode applies to all media types except Transparency and Vellum Line Thinning Printer Driver Settings Line thinning reduces the pen width of lines used for barcodes and line drawings Drawing values controlled by an application are not changed Item Description Off default setting Line thinning is not applied Barcodes This setting reduces the pen width value for vertical and horizontal lines It improves the readability of barcodes Fine
282. s each time you use this machine Enter the user information registered on the network authentication server as the login user name and password Register new users from the KYOCERA Net Policy Manager For details refer to the KYOCERA Net Policy Manager User Guide Note To carry out operations restricted in the mode selection menu operation and Lock Operation Panel settings itis necessary to log in as a user with administrator authority For the administrator settings refer to Administrator on page 4 116 For Lock Operation Panel refer to Lock Operation Panel on page 2 19 Login Use the procedure below to login 1 With the Login User Name entry field selected press OK The A Login User Name Login User Name entry screen is displayed Login Password Menu Login 4 114 Operation Panel Logout Login User Name n ABC Text Login User Name 7 User 1 Login Password Login Menu Login Password Text Login User Name 7 User 1 Login Password Login Menu P 2 ABC 3 DEF C clear 6 mno Document Box 9 wxvz 2 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK The login screen reappears Note For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Me
283. s possible Composition Do not use paper that has been coated or surface treated and contains plastic or carbon The heat of fusing can cause such paper to give off harmful fumes Bond paper should contain at least 80 pulp Not more than 20 of the total paper content should consist of cotton or other fibers Paper Sizes Cassettes and the MP tray are available for the paper sizes listed in the table below For details including the paper sizes for the paper feeder Optional paper feeder PF 320 refer to Setting the standard paper size on page 4 28 The dimensional tolerances are 0 7 mm 40 0276 inches for the length and width The angle at the corners must be 90 0 2 Yes Can be stored No Cannot be stored Cassete ACON Cassette BUIK Paper Paper Size Size On FS 4200DN PF 320 PES MP Tray FS 4300DN Envelope Monarch 3 88 x 7 5 inches No No Yes Yes Yes Envelope 10 4 13 x 9 5 inches No No Yes Yes Yes Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm No Yes Yes Yes Yes Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Executive 7 25 x 10 5 inches Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Letter 8 5 x 11 inches Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Legal 8 5 x 14 inches Yes Yes Yes No Yes A4 210 x 297 mm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes B5 JIS 182 x 257 mm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A5 148 x 210 mm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A6 105 x 148 mm No Yes No Yes Yes B6 128 x 182 mm No Yes Yes Yes Yes Envelope 9 3 88 x 8 88 inches No No Yes Yes Yes Envelope 6 3 4 3
284. s specifies the setting for confirmation of replacement with the new Maintenance Kit resets the total number of Maintenance Kit print images This is primarily used for maintenance by service personnel Note The Maintenance menu is displayed only when Replace MK appears This specifies the setting for confirmation of replacement with the new Developer resets the total number of Developer print images This is primarily used for maintenance by service personnel Yes No Yes No Auto DrumRefresh An automatic drum refresh is sometimes carried out when the power supply is switched on or when the machine recovers from sleep mode In order to maintain the image quality the automatic drum refresh is implemented automatically after observing the surrounding temperature and humidity Here the time for carrying out the automatic drum refresh is set Off Short Standard Long Drum This sets the refresh mode for the drum When the printing quality declines Yes No refreshing the drum can restore the printing quality This is primarily used for maintenance by service personnel Write Data This writes data to USB memory Yes No Note This menu only appears when USB memory is inserted Altitude Adj This sets the altitude adjustment mode If you are using the machine at an Normal High 1 altitude of 1500 m or higher and print quality has deteriorated the Altitude High 2 Adjustment mode setting can be used to restore print
285. s such as optional features installed in the print system You can also specify the device settings after you exit the installation For details refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on the Product Library disc This completes the printer driver installation procedure Follow the on screen instructions to restart the system if required Custom Mode Use Custom Mode if you want to specify the printer port and select the software to be installed For example if you do not want fonts installed on your computer to be replaced select Custom Mode and deselect the Fonts checkbox in the utility tab Select Custom Mode Installation Method Choose how lo ratal the scftware Following the instructions in the install wizard window select the software packages to be installed and specify the port etc Express Mode katad the seconmerded pring sflmare The perfing maton mat be corrected For details refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on the Product Library disc Utilities etal perting system tines orty Okyocera EA c 3 Preparation before Use Installation on a Macintosh eno a I mj j ol QO a Document Li 5 tems Zero KB avaliable eoo 4 OS X 10 5 or higher sd E a imi Lo o a Ls A aem Zoro KB ovate 4 AN Install FS 21000 FS 21000N FS 41000N FS 42000N FS 4300DN me to the F5 2100D F5 2100DN F5 4100DN F5 42000N ler t IKUOCERG S a D000 std Introd
286. s the printer s paper paths including the optional paper feeder The locations where paper jams might occur are also shown here with each location explained in the table below Paper jams can occur in more than one component on the paper paths Face up Tray Troubleshooting Paper Jam Message Peper Jam Description SOT location Page A Paper is jammed at the MP tray or page 8 19 Paper jammed optional bulk paper feeder page 8 23 at MP tray Paper jammed in the Bulk Feeder B Paper is jammed at the paper page 8 20 Paper cassette The cassette number jammed in can be 1 topmost to 5 bottom cassette C Paper is jammed inside the duplex page 8 21 Paper jammed section in the duplex unit D Paper is jammed inside the printer page 8 22 Paper jammed in the printer E Paper is jammed inside the rear page 8 23 Paper jammed in the Rear cover unit 8 18 Troubleshooting General Considerations for Clearing Jams Bear in mind the following considerations when attempting paper jam removal CAUTION When pulling the paper pull it gently so as not to tear it Torn pieces of paper are difficult to remove and may be easily overlooked deterring the paper jam recovery If paper jams occur frequently try using a different type of paper replace the paper with paper from another ream
287. screen select the item and press OK The Print 40001 ABC box 3 Delete menu screen appears Print Print ChangeSet Delete 2 Press or V to select Print ChangeSet p 3 Press OK The Copies menu screen appears Copies 9 Ok oo 1 999 If you want to change the number of remaining copies to be printed use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the number of copies to HEN ics be printed F ti Note If Job Accounting is enabled enter the account ID in the Function login screen that appears The Copies menu screen appears after login Function Right Select can be pressed to change the print settings For details refer to Print Function Settings on page 5 18 n 4 Press OK The Paper Source menu screen appears Paper Source pai OK Letter Recycled i A4 Plain Function 5 Press A or V to select the tray containing the paper you want to use 6 Press OK The message Accepted appears and printing begins Accepted When on is selected in the Del afterPrint Setting for file deletion after printing on page 5 11 the selected file will be deleted from the Custom Box after it is printed Print Function Settings When printing the print settings can be changed Options available in Print Function Settings are as follows Duplex Setting the duplex printing 5 19 EcoPrint Selecting the EcoPrint mode 5 19 File Name Entry entering a file nam
288. sed for printing and load the paper into the cassette Other Paper Size Setting the Paper Size from the Operation Panel Use the operation panel to set the size of paper loaded in the cassette on the printer Note When Custom is selected it is possible to enter the paper size For details refer to Custom PaperSize Ss Setting a Custom Paper Size on page 4 31 1 Inthe Paper Settings menu press A or V to select the paper cassette assigned to Other on the Size Dial x 2 Press OK The Cassette Set menu screen appears Cassette 1 Set ll Medib Type shows the number of the cassette installed in the printer 1 to 5 Other Paper Size Exit 3 Press or V to select Other Paper Size Pa 4 Press OK The Other Paper Size screen appears listing the Other Paper Size VW paper sizes that can be used in the cassette 04 Letter The available paper sizes are as follows Legal Envelope Monarch 2 A4 l Envelope 10 2 Envelope DL 3 Envelope C5 Executive Letter Legal A4 B5 A5 A6 1 B6 3 Envelope 9 2 Envelope 6 2 ISO B5 4 30 Operation Panel Custom Oufuku Hagaki 3 Oficio II 216x340mm 16K Statement Folio Youkei 2 2 Youkei 4 2 1 Cassette 1 for the FS 4100DN FS 4200DN and FS 4300DN 2 Only when optional paper feeder PF 320 is installed 3 Cassette 1 except for the FS 2100D and FS 2100DN 5 Press A
289. setting 4 105 USB Storage USB memory setting 4 105 1 Inthe security menu press A or V to select I F Block Set 4 103 Operation Panel 2 Press OK The I F Block Set menu screen appears F Block Set D USB Device Option I F Exit USB Host USB Port setting This blocks and protects the USB Port USB Host The default setting is Unblock 1 Inthe I F Block Set menu press A or V to select USB Host 2 Press OK The USB Host screen appears USB Host Uu 2 Block 3 Press or V to select whether to block and protect the USB host 4 Press OK The USB Host setting is set and the I F Block Set menu reappears USB Device USB interface setting This blocks and protects the USB interface The default setting is Unblock 1 Inthe I F Block Set menu press or V to select USB Device 2 Press OK The USB Device screen appears USB Device paid OK 01 Unblock 02 Block 3 Press or V to select whether to block and protect the USB device 4 Press OK The USB Device setting is set and the I F Block Set menu reappears Option I F Optional network interface setting This blocks and protects the optional network interface The default setting is Unblock 1 Inther F Block Set menu press A or V to select Option I F 2 Press OK The Option I F screen appears Option I F Dn 01 Unblock 02 Block
290. size 4 28 Media Type Setting the cassette paper type 4 29 Setting the cassette paper size To set the standard sizes for the paper cassette load the paper and turn the paper size dial so that the size of the paper you are going to use appears in the paper size window To adjust the paper width guides and the paper length guide of the paper cassette refer to Loading Paper into the Cassette on page 2 22 If the PF 320 optional paper feeder is installed use the same procedure to load paper into the paper feeder cassettes 4 28 Operation Panel 1 Pull the cassette out of the printer and set the paper size using the paper size dial 2 Adjust the paper guides in the cassette to the size of the paper to be used for printing and load the paper into the cassette Media Type Setting the cassette paper type By setting a paper type plain recycled etc for the paper cassette you can automatically select the paper in the paper cassette according to the paper type you command on the printer driver The default setting is plain paper for all paper cassettes If the PF 320 optional paper feeder is installed use the same procedure to setting the cassette paper type For more information about paper types that you can feed from the paper cassette refer to Paper Specifications on page A 13 Cassette 1 Set f0 Media Type Other Paper Size Exit Media Type 2 Preprinted Bond om 1
291. snsonss doascedsnscsssadessassniesseners 1 2 Internal Components GANI NAGTANGKANG EL bodes sageessdiusinnyadiesys 1 3 Components at the Rear of the Printer ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee sete eee BESS NBSB BASBASAN SAAN nnt tnter 1 4 Operation Panel AANGAT ANNA 1 5 1 1 Machine Parts Components at the Front Right of the Printer Paper Stopper Top Tray Paper Width Guides MP tray MP Multi Purpose Tray Support Tray Section of the MP Tray Cassette 1 Operation Panel USB Memory Slot Power Switch Handholds Paper Size Window oOAN Oa PR O N mb Components at the Left of the Printer 12 Left Cover 13 Waste Toner Box 14 Handholds 1 2 Machine Parts Internal Components lt 18 SAN IN NN NN NA NN III ID X A y O 0 N o 15 NNNN OW Jo o 15 Top Cover 16 Toner Container 17 Lock Lever 18 Front Cover 19 Duplex Front Cover 20 Developer Unit 21 Registration Roller 22 Paper Width Guides 23 Paper Width Adjusting Tab 24 Paper Length Guide 25 Paper Length Adjusting Tab 26 Paper Size Dial 1 3 Machine Parts Components at the Rear of the Printer 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 FS 2100D FS 2100DN Option Interface Slot Network Interface Connector Only network compatible models USB Port For Ca
292. ssages 000002 ee eee 8 19 Mode Selection Menu 2 202000 20a 4 9 Moving printer 20 000 c eee eee eee 7 10 MP Multi Purpose Tray 2200 0055 1 2 Loading Paper 0 0 a 2 25 Media Type 0 0 c ccc eee eee 4 27 Paper Feed source a 4 39 Paper Size e eiei x bs doxes BA toe aba 4 26 MP tray clearing paper jams 000000 eee eee eee 8 19 MP Tray Priority llle 4 39 N NetBEUl papaka AD Nka Glossary 2 Network Interface Connector aaa 1 4 Network Interface Kit 00s A 10 Network Settings eee eee eee 2 2 Network settings llle eese 4 54 pul T TT 4 55 BONJOU paaa xot na o KG ADA AN ime ER 4 58 Default Gateway eee eee 4 57 DHCP suut estate dt S UR t Dna 4 55 DEGOPVOS cuum duse m Qiu Pe rod suena mia 4 59 FTP Server ss mE eR emn andit 4 60 EET KGG Baan seuss ang te DP Sa Gayang iex suma ene unns 4 60 IP Address 23 tects wine E Ru E dk pietas 4 56 IPA Setting ui vee oe ed tte orem EH ren 4 55 IPVO SEINO ds Ser anre E oe eek Pee end 4 58 EDAP is TEM 4 60 PD ie wick beets Lice bbe nh he bee Sho 4 60 NetBEUI cie ie rere Sie cece seat 4 60 POP3 E mail RX aoaaa aaua aaua 4 60 Protocol Detail iie e cac accea conie eeri me e 4 60 RA Stateless 1 aa cae decane eed ad aed ae irs 4 59 RAW Potters 25055284 bese NING ADS same NA 4 60 SMTP E mail TX cu asriecc eise ehe hd 4 60 SNMP3 cis Dna ean Si
293. ssword and type the password This can be selected when Shared box is selected in the SSD Settings dialog box 4 Click OK to return to the Print dialog box Job Box Quick Copy Select Quick copy Proof and Hold Select Proof and hold Private Print Select Private print and set the Access code Stored Job Select Job storage Set the Access code if necessary Note For information on how to use the printer driver software refer to the Printer Driver User Guide 5 34 6 Status Menu This chapter contains explanations on the following topics Displaying the Status Menu SCIGO uui idirinis ai ia cp T ROG HU MER DEN DI AER nana ERE MM Mu dU EE UU EI i MEE FERM 6 2 M Roc me eisa 6 2 SIE ARAR 6 4 USB Keyboard PTT HH 6 5 Wireless NI fer EEE 6 5 6 1 Status Menu Displaying the Status Menu Screen Ready to print OTEN NA t Status Pma Ok Job Status Job Log Job Status 6 2 USB Keyboard Job Log 6 4 Exit USB Keyboard 6 5 Job Status Wireless Network 6 5 If Status is displayed atthe left of the bottom row of the message display whilst the machine is printing or awaiting printing it is possible to display the Status menu screen Press Status Left Select
294. stom Box an optional SSD HD 6 must be installed in the printer The HD 6 must be formatted from the printer For more information refer to Format SSD Formatting the SSD on page 4 82 The Custom Box is a general purpose box which allows the user to save print data on the printer s SSD and then re use it whenever necessary The transmission of data to save in the box is done with the printer driver For more information refer to the Printer Driver User Guide Use the printer s operation panel to print the print data stored in a Custom Box Note On network compatible models the creation and setting of Custom Boxes is also possible from Command amp N Center RX Procedure for printing using Custom Box Follow the work flow below when using Custom Box Registering the Custom Box page 5 5 v Specifying the Custom Box from a computer and sending the print job page 5 34 v Using the operation panel to specify a file within a Box and printing it page 5 16 Operation panel display 1 Press Document Box Either the Custom Box list screen or the Custom Box om Job Box menu screen is displayed Note After pressing Document Box it is possible to display SF either the Custom Box list screen or the Job Box menu screen or to set them Refer to Def Screen Box Document Box default Menu Add screen setting on page 4 75 If the Job Box menu screen is displayed follow the procedure below to display th
295. stricted in the account when job accounting is effective To change the account settings refer to Detail Edit Checking editing registered account ID settings on page 4 124 Cannot perform It is not possible to perform sanitization because a job is being processed etc Cannot remove the memory while in use This message is displayed when Remove Memory was selected while a USB memory was being used The previous screen is displayed again 1 or 2 seconds Cassette not loaded The corresponding paper cassette is not installed Install the cassette The cassette number can be 1 topmost to 5 bottom Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action This message is displayed when a paper lift error has occurred in the paper Check cassette source s cassette Pull out the cassette for the paper source displayed either the paper cassettes or optional paper feeders and check if the paper is loaded correctly The message Call service is displayed when this error occurs repeatedly This message warns following two cases Install the new waste toner box Check waste toner The waste toner box is not installed bes The waste toner box is full For details refer to Replacing the Waste Toner Box on page 7 6 The left cover of the printer is open Close the left cover Close left cover The rear cover of the pr
296. supplied from the MP tray The default setting is Letter size for the U S and Canada and A4 for other countries For more information about the paper sizes that you can feed from the MP tray refer to Paper on page A 13 1 Inthe Paper Settings menu press A or V to select MP Tray Set n 2 Press OK The MP Tray Set menu screen appears MP Tray Set lt 0 Paper Size Media Type Exit 3 Press A or V to select Paper Size 4 26 Operation Panel Paper Size Sma OK Envelope C5 Executive o6 Letter 4 Press OK The Paper Size screen appears listing the paper sizes 5 6 that can be supplied from the MP tray The available paper sizes are as follows Envelope Monarch Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Executive Letter Legal A4 B5 A5 A6 B6 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 ISO B5 Custom Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Oficio II 216x340mm 16K Statement Folio Youkei 2 Youkei 4 Press A or V to select the desired paper size Press OK The paper size for the MP tray is set and the MP Tray Set menu screen reappears Media Type Paper type setting for the MP tray You can use this to set the paper type that can be supplied from the MP tray The default setting is PLAIN For more information about paper types that you can feed from the MP tray refer to Paper on page A 13 MP Tray Set Sma OK Paper Size Media Type Exit 1 2
297. t 3 6 Printing For more details on operation refer to Op Functions Optional application settings on page 4 130 Secure Pull Printing Optional Feature Secure Pull Printing is a printing feature where a user pulls the print job to a printer selected after the job is spooled in a server To use this feature the following system environments are required 5 The spooler 2 The spooler server server sends the receives the print job print job to the 1 A user sends the print job to the spooler server selected printer 6 The user pulls the print job from the selected printer 3 The user logins to the 4 The Authentication printer or other MFP via Server confirms the an Authentication Server login information using an ID card registered The Authentication server KYOCERA Net Policy Manager Optional Software must be installed ID card and ID card reader they are used to register and authenticate a user The Spooler server it sends the print job to a selected printer after the user logs in For more details contact your dealer or service representative 3 7 Printing 4 Operation Panel This chapter contains explanations on the following topics Message DISBIS AGANG ME M DM EN DNI M MM bi UMS 4 2 KONG m 4 4 Using the Menu Selection System a KAKAIBA 4 7 Setting a Mode Selection
298. t ic sie ceed be eee area eee eee Pus 5 28 Proof and Hold 20000 0c eeeaee 5 25 5 28 Quick Copy 22 60 esse eave eed ars Rex ve ees 5 25 Quick Copy Proof and Hold 000 eee ee 5 25 Stored JOD L A na cake NG bee eke DER ees 5 28 K Key Back K6y 2 be HG NG EN Ert etre enl 1 5 4 4 Cancel Key visas eae Nkaka Eher tea 1 5 4 4 Clear Key 2 2 s ren tex Phe Pek ede 1 5 4 5 Document Box Key llle 1 5 4 5 Left Select Key 0 0 eee eee 1 5 4 6 Logout Key 0 cee eee 1 5 4 4 MENU Key 0 00 cece eee cece eee e ee eee 4 4 Menu Key 3 2 DR nate ed ea eR Ea mala 1 5 OK KEY occ sae eed poate cox ae eg 1 5 4 5 Right Select Key 00 000 1 5 4 6 Arrow Keys 0 000 cee eee ee eee 1 5 4 5 Numeric Keys lille 1 5 Numeric Keys llle 4 5 METRE oa eee eae a eee are ee oe eee 4 48 L labels 2 bd ches hae bie band bbb elated A 19 Language 600 eee 4 74 KAASAR 1 2 Lock Operation Panel a 2 19 M Machine Parts 00 e cece eee eee 1 1 Maintenance a 4 128 7 1 pila E reed Be Ph a Pek ea eee 4 128 Memory Checking Expansion Memory a A 8 Expansion Memory a A 6 Installation 0 0 eee A 6 Remove ssl A 7 Message Display 0 00 eese 1 5 4 2 Language 22258 kb dendig bade Cade d goede ce a 4 74 Status Information 0000 eee eee 4 2 Message display Online help me
299. t Level screen appears Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the level at which an alert will be displayed The setting is possible between 5 and 100 Press OK The Toner Alert Level is set and the TonerAlert Level menu reappears 4 95 Operation Panel Security Security function setting The security functions can be set up to protect printer operation and the print data IMPORTANT To change the Security function settings the administrator s Login User Name and Login Password must be entered For details of the administrator settings refer to Administrator on page 4 116 The options available in Security are as follows Network Security Network security setting 4 97 I F Block Set External interface block setting 4 103 Security Level 4 105 Data Security Data Security setting 4 106 Note The Data Security menu is used with the optional Data Security Kit E For details refer to Data Security amp Kit E Operation Guide 1 Press MENU Press A or V to select Security pa 3 Press OK The Login screen appears Login User Name te ee lel 4 Note When user login administration is set Login Password When logged in as an administrator the log in screen is not displayed and the Security menu screen is displayed The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other than an administrator Log in again as an administrator Login 4 With th
300. t Maint 4 128 Op Functions 4 130 Note Optional Network is only displayed when a network interface kit IB 50 or wireless network interface kit IB 51 is installed as an option 4 9 Operation Panel Report Print Prints a report The options available in the Report Print menu are as follows Menu Map Printing a menu map 4 10 Status Page Printing a printer s status page 4 12 Font List Printing a list of the printer s fonts 4 14 RAM File List Printing a list of the files on the RAM disk 4 15 SSD File List Printing a list of the files on the SSD 4 15 SD Card FileList Printing a list of the files on an SD SDHC memory card 4 16 1 Press MENU 2 Press A or V to select Report Print 3 Press OK The Report Print menu appears showing a list of the Report Print 3 types of report that can be printed Note that report types shown may vary depending on which optional units are installed in the printer Status Page Font List EXILE Menu Map Printing a menu map The printer prints a full list of the menu selection system menu map 1 Inthe Report Print menu press A or V to select Menu Map 2 Press OK A confirmation message is displayed Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set SV the screen for entering Job Accounting information is displayed Enter the Account ID and press OK 3 Press ves Left Select The message Accepted appears
301. t click the Status Monitor icon in the taskbar and select Exit in the menu to exit the Status Monitor Exit automatically The Status Monitor automatically shuts down after 5 minutes if it is not being used Screen Overview The screen overview of the Status Monitor is as follows Pop up window Toner info x We recommend the use of our own brand supplies We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine Pa 3D View 4 17 PM 11 15 2011 W 1 amp Status Monitor icon Pop up window If an information notification event occurs a pop up window appears This window only appears when the 3D View is open on the desktop 3D View This shows the status of the monitored printer as a 3D image You can choose whether to show or hide the 3D view from the menu displayed when you right click the Status Monitor icon If an information notification event occurs the 3D view and an alert sound are used to notify you For information on the sound notification settings refer to Notification Settings on page 2 15 2 13 Preparation before Use Hide the status monitor Command Center RX Always on top Opacity Enlarge window Notification www kyoceradocumentsolutions com Exit Status Monitor icon While the Status Monitor is running its icon is displayed in the taskbar notification area When you position the cursor over the icon the printer name appears
302. te Communication is only displayed on network compatible models 1 Inthe optional Network menu press A or V to select Communication Communication otn 2 Press OK The Communication screen appears o Standard NIC 3 Option NIC 4 72 Operation Panel 3 Press A or V to select the desired NIC Standard NIC standard network interface of the printer Option NIC optional network interface kit 4 Press OK The NIC is set and the Optional Network menu reappears 4 73 Device Common Selecting Setting the common device Selects sets all the functions in this printer The options available in Device Common are as follows IMPORTANT Def Screen Box Format SSD and Format SD Card only appear when the relevant option is Language Selecting the message language 4 74 Def Screen Box Document Box default screen setting 4 75 Date Setting Date and time settings 4 76 Buzzer Alarm Buzzer setting 4 79 RAM Disk Setting Using the RAM disk 4 81 Format SSD Formatting the SSD 4 82 Format SD Card Formatting the SD SDHC memory card 4 83 Display Bright Display brightness setting 4 83 Disp Backlight Display backlight setting 4 84 Error Handling Error detection setting 4 84 Timer Setting 4 86 USB KeyboardType USB keyboard type selection 4 94 TonerAlert Level Setting for the alert level for toner addition 4 94 installed 1 Press MENU Press A or V to sel
303. te When the access code is set to the document selected S in the check box Incorrect ID is displayed for the disagreement 4 Toprint 2 or more copies use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the number of copies to be printed After selecting the multiple copies in the printer driver you can also restore to 1 from the operation panel using the same method Note is displayed first and it means it according to the set number of copies when the data of each file is preserved In this setting each set number of copies is printed 5 Press OK The message Accepted appears and the printer prints the selected job You can individually delete stored jobs by performing the following procedure Jobs saved using Private Print will be automatically deleted when you turn the power off or after printing but jobs saved using Stored Job will not be deleted automatically Private Stored Dn User01 User02 2g User03 1 In the Job Box menu press A or V to select Private Stored Press OK The Private Stored screen appears listing the user names for stored jobs Press A or V to select the user name you entered in the printer driver 5 30 Document Box F 4 Press OK The printer displays a list of the jobs stored under the amp User01 7 selected user name Data01 doc 12031344 Data02 doc 12031344 Select 1 E 5 Press A or V to select the name of the job
304. ted appears and the printer prints Accepted the selected job Deleting a Quick Copy Proof and Hold Job Jobs saved using Quick Copy and Proof and Hold are automatically deleted when you turn the printer off but you can also use this procedure to delete jobs individually 1 Inthe Job Box menu press A or V to select Quick Copy 2 Press OK The Quick Copy screen appears listing the user names Quick Copy lt u for stored jobs 2 User02 2g User03 5 27 Document Box 2g User01 om AData01 doc 12031344 3Data02 doc 12031344 Select Delete a File Delete the file s selected in the Job Box 2 User01 D Delete Delete Are you sure amp SDpata01 do Yes I c 120313 No Completed Press A or V to select the user name you entered in the printer driver Press OK The printer displays a list of the jobs stored under the selected user name Press A or V to select the name of the job to be deleted When Select Right Select is pressed the file is selected A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file Select the checkmarked file and press Select Right Select again to cancel the selection Note To select all files follow the steps of Select Deselect All Files on page 5 26 In the file list screen select the item and press OK The Print Delete menu screen appears
305. ter the machine s IP address e g http 10 183 54 29 The web page displays basic information about the machine and Command Center RX as well as their current status http 10 183 54 29 ID Da http 10 183 54 29 KYOCERA a 3 Select an item from the navigation bar on the left of the screen The settings must be configured separately depending on the items Englisl If restrictions have been set for Command Center RX enter the correct user name and password to access pages other than the startup page Device amp Printer Status Mess For more information refer to the Command Center RX User Guide GB Device Information E mail Setting Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send notification of the end of a Job via E mail To use this function this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol Also check the following The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server A full time connection via a LAN is recommended SMTP Settings Use Command Center RX to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server If limits have been set on the size of E mail messages it may not be possible to send large volume E mails The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below 1 Click Settings gt Advanced gt SMTP gt General KYOCERA Command Center FEX Basic Printer Advanced vances SMTP S
306. tes RR NGA S ne o 4 60 SNMPV3 2 leen 4 60 Subnet Mask aansen 000 cece eee 4 56 MOPAR maa ad chars Narag acs ans NG hana EE 4 54 TCP IP IPV6 eee eee eee ee 4 59 O Online help messages for clearing paper jams 0 a 8 19 Operation Panel aana 1 2 1 5 Option Bulk paper feeder 0 0 0 A 5 expansion memory module a A 5 Faceup output tray eee A 5 Network Interface Kit eee eae A 5 Paper feeder aa AA wedge t A 5 Parallel Interface Kit 2c eee eee ee A 5 SD SDHC Memory Card 200000 A 5 A 9 SS PAA A 5 USB flash memory c cece eee eee A 5 Wireless Network Interface Kit A 5 Option Interface Slot o 0 0 0 0 eee eee ee 1 4 Optional Functions 0 0 00 eee eee eee 4 130 Optional Network settings 4 62 AppleTalk 2 2a mina kas BG cireres REG o Eini iae a 4 70 SE la eu eave Peek EA ek Matern 4 69 Communication 4 72 IPS OC AA AA 4 71 LAN Interface 0 cee eee 4 71 MAC address filtering eee eee 4 72 Netware aana cece 4 70 Restart Network cece eee eee eee 4 72 TEPIIP SENGS ana dees oro kenga aa ea 4 69 Wireless Network 000000 e eee eee 4 63 Orientation 020 ee 4 50 Other Paper Size 00000 ee 4 30 P Page Setting ocr ons m Rem n e x x OR RR 4 50 Paper Index 2 Colored Paper 0000 cece eee eee eee
307. the installed toner container is non genuine The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for damage caused by a non genuine toner We recommend that you only use genuine toner containers When you want to use the toner container currently installed press OK and Cancel simultaneously for 3 seconds or more Paper jammed EER ERER EHH A paper jam has occurred The location of the paper jam is indicated in place of the s For details refer to Clearing Paper Jams on page 8 17 Paper path error Set cassette There is no paper cassette in the feeder or the cassette is not inserted properly After reinserting the corresponding paper cassette you should be able to print When two or more optional feeders are installed and the lowest one is selected the same message will appear if any of the upper paper feeder and the printer cassette is improperly installed 8 13 Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action Print overrun The data transferred to the printer was too complex to print on a page Press OK to resume printing RAM disk error Press OK tit A RAM disk error has occurred Look at the error code given in place of The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 02 RAM Disk Mode is set to Of f Set the setting to On Refer to RAM Disk Mode Setting the RAM disk on page 4 82 03 The RAM disk is write protected using c
308. the setting for handling paper mismatch errors 4 Press OK The handling of paper mismatch errors is set and the Error Handling menu screen reappears MP Tray Empty Warning when the MP tray is empty Turn this setting to On if you want the error displayed when the MP tray is configured as the default paper source and there is no paper in the MP tray or turn it to Of not to have the error displayed The setting On enables the paper empty message to display when the MP tray is empty 1 Inthe Error Handling menu press A or V to select MP Tray Empt y 4 85 Operation Panel 2 Press OK The MP Tray Empty screen appears MP Tray Empty pad OK Off 3 Press A or V to select the setting for the paper empty message to display 4 Press OK The display of MP Tray Empty is set and the Error Handling menu screen reappears Timer Setting This specifies timer related settings such as the automatic form feed timeout and the timeout settings for Auto Sleep IMPORTANT To change the Timer Setting the administrator s Login User Name and Login Password must be entered For details of the administrator settings refer to Administrator on page 4 116 The options available in Timer Setting are as follows Auto Panel Reset Auto panel reset setting 4 87 PanelReset Timer Setting the panel reset timer 4 88 Sleep Level Set Sleep level setting 4 88 Sleep Timer Sleep timer ti
309. the terms of this License Agreement you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers you need to acquire a multi user license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging Monotype Imaging retains all rights title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces except that you may make one backup copy You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces unless sooner terminated This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty 30 days after notice from Monotype Imaging When this License expires or is terminated you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested You agree that you will not modify alter disassemb
310. ther or not to receive On e documents using FTP SNMP Select whether or not to On e communicate using SNMP SMTP E mail TX Select whether or not to send e Off x mail using SMTP POP3 E mail RX Select whether or not to receive e Off x mail using POP3 RAW Port Select whether or not to On e communicate using RAW Port LPD Select whether or not to receive On e documents using LPD as the network protocol HTTP Select whether or not to On e communicate using HTTP LDAP Select whether or not to use LDAP Off x T The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed x The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed Use the procedure below 1 Inthe TCP IP Settings menu press A or V to select Protocol Detail Protocol SNMPv3 Detail m NetBEUI FTP Server Exit C NetBEU o of h ping OK step 3 o Press A or V to select On or Off 2 Press OK The Protocol Detail menu screen appears Press A or V to select the item for which you want to make settings 4 Press OK This displays the setting screen for the item selected in The screen shown is the one when NetBEUI is selected 6 Press OK The Protocol Detail menu reappears 4 60 Operation Panel Restart Network Restarting the network card After all network related settings have been done restart the network car
311. this machine set the SMTP and POP3 settings to On For details refer to Protocol Detail amp Detailed settings for the network protocol on page 4 60 A mail server must be registered For the method for setting a server refer to the Command Center RX User Guide 5 20 Document Box Function pad OK EcoPrint File Name Entry JobFinish Notice NG o1 Off 2 On Address Entry En ABC Text Function En EcoPrint File Name Entry Del after Print Gg 62 On 1 Inthe Copies menu or the Paper Selection menu press Function Right Select The Function menu appears 2 Press or V to select JobFinish Notice 3 Press OK The JobFinish Notice screen appears 4 Press or V to select On 5 Press OK The Address Entry screen appears 6 Enter the E Mail address to be notified f Note Up to 128 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 for details on entering characters When user login administration is set the address of the logged in user is entered 7 Press OK Register the address and the Function menu reappears Del after Print Delete data after printing setting Use this setting to specify whether or not the file data is deleted after printing 1 Inthe Copies menu or the Paper Selection menu press Function Right Select The Function menu appears
312. thod on page A 2 3 Press or V to selectthe Login Password entry field 4 Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed 5 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK The login screen reappears Note For details on entering characters refer to Character SV Entry Method on page A 2 6 Check that the correct login user name and password have been entered then press Login Right Select Z Note When Job Accounting is set it is possible to press SS Menu Left Select then select Counter on the menu displayed and press OK to see the number of pages printed When the operations are finished press Logout The login screen reappears Auto Logout Logout is automatically executed in the following cases When the power supply is off When the machine enters the sleep mode after the setting time of Auto Sleep has passed When the power of the machine turns off after the setting time of auto power off has passed When the settings are restored to the default after the setting time of Auto Panel Reset has passed 4 115 Operation Panel Administrator In the local user list for the machine 1 user with administrator authority and 1 user with device administrator authority are registered Each user s properties are Machine Administrator Administrator User Name DeviceAdmin User Name Admin Login User Name FS 2100D 4000 FS 2100DN 400
313. ting This sets whether or not to enable MAC address filtering Note The detailed settings for MAC address filtering are selected using the optional network interface kit utility software 1 Inthe Basic menu press A or V to select MACAddressFilter n 2 Press OK The MACAddressFilter screen appears MACAddressFilter Mm o Off 02 On 3 Press or V to select whether MAC address filtering is enabled 4 Press OK The MAC address filtering setting is set and the Basic menu reappears Restart Network Restarting the optional network interface kit After all network related settings have been done restart the network card of the device This is mandatory to make the settings effective 1 Inthe Basic menu press A or V to select Restart Network 2 Press OK A confirmation screen appears Restart Are you sure Yes No 3 Press ves Left Select The message Restarting appears and the network is restarted Pressing No Right Select returns to the Basic menu without restarting the network Communication Select the network interface to use The client function such as the network authentication and the reference of user information via LDAP operates only by the selected interface This function is mainly used for the network system administrator For more information about each function refer to Command Center RX User Guide and IB 50 IB 51 User s Manual No
314. tings When this setting is On switch it to off on the operation panel ABC ABC Make sure the paper type setting is correct the paper being used Refresh the drum to restore the printing quality For more information 1 2 3 1 2 3 refer to Service Setting for Maintenance on page 4 128 Then adjust the print density For more information refer to Print Density Selecting the Print Density on page 4 49 If the damp paper is loaded into the cassette or MP tray replace the paper with a newer dryer paper If the problem is not solved using the corrective action above call for ABC service 123 Gray background Refresh the drum to restore the printing quality For more information refer to Service Setting for Maintenance on page 4 128 ABC Then adjust the print density For more information refer to Print Density Selecting the Print Density on page 4 49 If the problem is not solved using the corrective action above call for 1 2 3 service 8 3 Troubleshooting Printed Results Corrective Action Dirt on the top edge or back of the If the problem is not solved even after printing several pages clean paper the registration roller For more information refer to Cleaning the Printer on page 7 8 If the problem is not solved after cleaning call for service ABC 123 Printing incomplete or out of position Check that the application software is correctly operated Refer to Tips on page 8
315. tion KPDL Alt Error Rpt Emulation Exit om Emulation Set Emulation Set Line Printer KPDL om 6 KPDL Auto Note To print the PDF file using FTP printing set emulation to KPDL 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Emulation 2 Press OK The Emulation menu screen appears 5 Press A or V to select Emulation Set 4 Press OK The Emulation Set screen appears showing a list of the available emulations The defaults differ depending on the delivery destination The available emulations are as follows PCL6 IBM Proprinter EPSON LQ 850 Line Printer KPDL KPDL Auto o Press or V to select the desired emulation 6 Press OK The emulation is set and the Emulation menu reappears KPDL Error Rpt Printing KPDL errors The printer can print error descriptions when printing error occurs during KPDL emulation The default setting differs depending on the countries or regions IMPORTANT This setting only appears when KPDL or KPDL Auto Emulation KPDL Alt Error Rpt Emulation Exit em Emulation Set is selected for the emulation 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Emulation 2 Press OK The Emulation menu screen appears 3 Press or V to select KPDL 4 43 Error Rpt Operation Panel 4 Press
316. tive Action Print quality is not good Refer to Print Quality Problems on page 8 3 Paper is jammed Refer to Clearing Paper Jams on page 8 17 Nothing lights on the operation panel even when power is turned on and the fan makes no noise Check that the power cord is properly plugged into the power outlet Plug in the power cord securely and try turning on the printer s power again If the corrective action above will not solve the problem pull out the power cord from the outlet Wait more than 1 minute and then plug the power cord into the outlet and try turning on the printer s power again Press the power switch The printer prints a status page but does not print jobs from the computer Check the printer cable or the interface cable Connect both ends of the printer cable securely Try replacing the printer cable or the interface cable Check program files and application software Try printing another file or using another print command If the problem occurs only with a specific file or application check the printer driver settings for that application The printer is emitting steam in the area around the top tray Check the room temperature to see if it is low or if damp paper was used Depending on the printing environment and the paper s condition the heat generated during printing will cause the moisture in the paper to evaporate and the steam emitted may look
317. to be printed When Select Right Select is pressed the file is selected A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file Select the checkmarked file and press Select Right Select again to cancel the selection Note To select all files follow the steps of Select Deselect All Files on page 5 26 Delete a File Delete the file s selected in the Job Box 1 In the file list screen select the item and press OK The Print amp User0l lt m Delete menu screen appears Print Delete E 2 Press A or V to select Delete and press OK The ID is ID m displayed 0001 4 3 Use the numeric keys to enter the access code entered in the printer driver 4 Press Enter Right Select If the entered access code is Delete correct the Delete menu screen appears If the entered access code Are you sure is incorrect the ID menu screen reappears BData0l doc 120313 Note When the access code is set to the document selected amp in the check box ID error is displayed for the disagreement Yes No 5 Press Yes Left Select complete appears and the printer Completed deletes the selected job Pressing No Right Select returns to the file list screen Document Box Job Box Setting Job Box Configuration Change Job Box setting such as the maximum number of storable documents in the SSD or SD SDHC memory card and aut
318. to enable print jobs to be sent between remote computers and printers IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations It also supports the HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption Job Box The Job Box function stores print data on the printer and allows users to print single or multiple copies of the stored data later using the printer s operation panel KPDL Kyocera s PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3 Multi Purpose MP Tray Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto envelopes Hagaki transparencies or labels NetBEUI NetBIOS Extended User Interface An interface developed by IBM in 1985 as an update from NetBIOS It enables more advanced functions on smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP IP etc It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS 2 and Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services NetWare Novell s network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems Outline font With outline fonts character outlines are represented with numerical expressions and fonts can be enlarged or reduced in different ways by changing
319. to select the character you want to enter Right Select Key Press this key to select the type of characters you want to enter When Text is displayed Arrow Keys Use these to select the entry position or select a character from the character list OK Key Press this key to finalize the entered character s Clear Key Press this key to delete the character at the cursor position If the cursor is at the end of the line the character to the left of it is deleted o0 O N A 2 Appendix Selecting Type of Characters To enter characters the following three types are available File name input Report 3f Text Types Description ABC To enter alphabets 123 To enter numerals Symbols To enter symbols Current character type Y ABC Text 123 Text Symbols Di I 5 amp t 8 XY CI E fnt ES e e a SO Text ooo Do Entering Characters After selecting a character type use the procedure below to enter characters Entering Alphabets and Numerals In a character entry screen press Text Right Select to select the type of characters you want to enter Each time you press Text Right Select the character type switches as follows ABC 123 Symbols ABC Referring to the table below press the key corresponding to the character you want to enter until it is displayed
320. tock envelope and thick the MP Multi Purpose tray must be used For information on how to set paper sizes refer to MP Tray Set MP tray settings on page 4 26 Paper Cassette MP Tray Minimum Paper Size Minimum Paper Size 148 mm 5 83 inches 148 mm 5 83 inches 14 g 105 mm 3 70 mm 5 4 13 inches 9 2 76 inches ES E N eo Eg QD oO e ox Maximum Maximum Paper Size Paper Size 216 mm 216 mm 8 5 inches 8 5 inches Note On FS 2100D and FS 2100DN the minimum size of Paper Cassette is 140 x 210 mm 5 5 x 8 25 inches s3 On the optional paper feeder PF 320 the minimum size is 92 x 162 mm 3 62 x 6 38 inches and the maximum size is 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches Recommended Paper The following products are recommended for use with the printer for optimum performance Size Product Weight Letter Legal International Paper Hammermill Tidal MP 75 g m 20 Ib A4 Nautilus ReFresh TRIOTEC 80 g m Appendix Selecting the Right Paper This section describes the guidelines for selecting paper Condition Avoid using paper that is bent at the edges curled dirty torn embossed or contaminated with lint clay or paper shreds Use of paper in these conditions can lead to illegible printing and paper jams and can shorten the life of the machine In particular avoid using paper with a surface coating or other surface treatment Paper should have as smooth and even a surface a
321. twork card on page 4 61 Network Settings This section explains the settings for when DHCP is used or when an IP Address is entered while TCP IPv4 is selected For details of the settings refer to Network Network settings on page 4 54 Also for how to use the Menu Selection System refer to Using the Menu Selection System on page 4 7 Note When entering an IP Address manually check the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway with the J system administrator R 1 While the printer displays Ready to print Please wait and Menu 7 Processing press Menu The mode selection menu is displayed USB Memory Counter Exit 2 Press A or V to select Network n 3 Press OK The Network menu screen appears Network D TCP IP Settings Restart Network Exit 2 3 Preparation before Use Checking that TCP IP is On This is an explanation of the method for setting for IPv4 but TCP IP should also be On when setting for IPv6 4 Select TCP IP Settings and press OK The TCP IP Settings menu screen appears TCP IP Settings MG IPv4 Settin IPv6 Settin Exit o Press A or V to select TCP IP 6 Press OK The TCP IP screen appears TCP IP En 0 Of h 7 Check that On is selected If Off is selected then press A or V to select On Note is displayed for the setting which has been selected 8 Pres
322. uction You will be guided through the steps necessary to stall ftware omme an System Preferences gt Show au fal Personal c ui mM d Eo Q Appearanc Spotlight e Deskton amp Dock Expos Language Secwrity Screen Saver Spaces Text Hardware m CDs amp OVOs Displays Energy Keyboard Mouse Trackpad Sound Saver Internet amp Wireless e 6 m Mos eMe Network teram Turn on the printer and the Macintosh Insert the Product Library disc supplied with the printer into the optical drive of the Macintosh Double click the Product Library disc icon displayed on the desktop Double click either OS X 10 4 Only or OS X 10 5 or higher depending on your Mac OS version Double click Kyocera OS X 10 x The printer driver installation program starts up Choose Destination Select Installation Type and then install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software Note In addition to Standard Install the Installation Type amp options include Custom Install which allows you to specify the components to be installed IMPORTANT In the Authentication screen enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system This completes the printer driver installation Next specify the print settings If an IP or AppleTalk connection is used the settings below are required If a USB connection is used the printer is automatically recognized
323. ugh Thin paper 60 to 64 g m Vellum Label Labels Recycled paper Recycled Preprinted paper Preprinted Bond paper Bond Postcards Cardstock Colored paper Color Prepunched paper Prepunched Letterhead Letterhead Envelopes Envelope Thick paper 120 to 220 g m Thick High quality paper High Quality Custom Custom 1 8 Use paper that is sold specifically for use with copiers or printers heat fusing type When using transparencies labels thin paper postcards or thick paper feed the paper from the MP tray For details refer to MP Tray Set MP tray settings on page 4 26 Since the composition and quality of special paper vary considerably special paper is more likely than white bond paper to give trouble during printing No liability will be assumed if moisture and so forth given off during printing on special paper causes harm to the machine or operator Note Before purchasing any type of special paper test a sample on the machine and check that printing quality is SF satisfactory Transparency Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of fusing during the printing process The recommended transparency product is 3M CG3700 Letter A4 The table below lists the specifications for transparency Item Specification Tolerance of heat Must tolerate at least 190 C 374 F Thickness 0 100 to 0 110 mm 3 9 to 4 3 mils Material Polyester Dimensional accuracy 0 7 mm 0 0276 inches Squ
324. ure of the NetWare OS is that it is specifically for servers unlike general purpose operating systems such as Windows NT and UNIX Only the minimum required for server operation can be performed from the NetWare OS console on the server Server and file management is basically carried out using management tools from the clients Also all drivers and protocol stacks are in the form of modules called NetWare Loadable Modules NLMs and the ability of NLMs to load and unload flexibly and dynamically is a major advantage of this system 1 Inthe Basic menu press A or V to select Netware n 2 Press OK The Netware screen appears NetWare Rud OK o Off 3 Press or V to select whether NetWare is enabled 4 Press OK The NetWare setting is set and the Basic menu reappears AppleTalk AppleTalk setting AppleTalk is a communications protocol used primarily on Macintosh computers and also refers to the Mac OS network functions AppleTalk assigns 24 bit network addresses a 16 bit network section and an 8 bit node address that are used to identify devices computers printers etc on the network When the power is turned on a broadcast signal is sent out onto the network and the addresses and machine names are automatically assigned The default setting is On 1 Inthe Basic menu press A or V to select AppleTalk 4 70 Operation Panel AppleTalk Off om IPSec IPSec setti
325. ures by pressing A or V Use lt and gt to move the position being entered which is shown highlighted 4 Press OK The subnet mask setting is stored and the 1Pv4 Setting menu reappears Default Gateway Gateway setting Gateway generally refers to a protocol conversion device used to allow networks with differing protocol systems to interconnect For example a Gateway device is required to connect a different closed network using its own protocols to the open Internet using TCP IP By installing a gateway the communications protocols and data display modes on different networks can be made compatible On TCP IP networks the term gateway is used to refer to routers Note Before you enter the gateway be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off 1 Inthe Ipv4 Setting menu press A or V to select Default Gateway 2 Press OK The Default Gateway screen appears Default Gateway OD MMM o o o 3 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the default gateway You can set any value between 000 and 255 Increase or reduce the figures by pressing A or V Use lt and to move the position being entered which is shown highlighted 4 Press OK The default gateway is stored and the IPv4 Setting menu reappears Operation Panel Bonjour Bonjour setting Bonjour also known as zero configuration networking is a service that automatically detects computers devices and services on an I
326. veral minutes Please wait Loading paper The paper in the cassette is being moved to a position where paper feed is possible This message is sometimes displayed for a short period when the cassette is returned to its original position for example after paper is added Note This message is not displayed on FS 2100D and FS 2100DN Please wait Adding toner Toner is currently being replenished This message may be displayed during continuous printing of a large volume of pages which require a large amount of toner such as with photographs etc Ready to print The printer is ready to print Processing The printer is receiving data to print This is also shown when the printer is reading an SD SDHC memory card USB memory SSD or RAM disk Canceling Jobs inside the printer are being canceled To cancel a job refer to Canceling a Printing Job on page 4 4 Error Codes For information on error code and errors where the printer requires the operator s attention refer to Error Messages on page 8 5 4 2 Operation Panel Indicators in Message Display ce ME OReady amp bData Attention Ready to print MIBAA AG Status Toner Ready Data and Attention Indicators The following indicators light during normal operation and whenever the printer needs attention Depending on the status of lighting each indicator has the following meaning
327. with which they pass through the machine This is affected by the smoothness size and moisture content of the paper and the way in which the paper is cut The higher the grade of paper you use the less risk there will be of paper jams and other problems and the higher the level of quality your printed output will reflect Differences between papers from different suppliers can also affect the machine s performance A high quality printer cannot produce high quality results when the wrong paper is used Low priced paper is not economical in the long run if it causes printing problems The recommended basis weight is Cassette 60 to 120 g m MP tray 60 to 220 g m PF 320 60 to 120 g m PF 315 60 to 220 g m Paper Specifications The following table summarizes the basic paper specifications Details are given on the following pages Item Specification Weight Cassette PF 320 60 to 120 g m 16 to 32 Ib ream MP Tray PF 315 60 to 220 g m 16 to 59 Ib ream Thickness 0 086 to 0 110 mm 3 4 to 4 3 mils Dimensions Refer to Paper Sizes on page A 15 Dimensional accuracy 0 7 mm 0 0276 inches Squareness of corners 90 0 2 Moisture content 4 Yo to 6 Yo Direction of grain Long grain Pulp content 80 96 or more A 13 Appendix Minimum and Maximum Paper Sizes The minimum and maximum paper sizes are as follows For non standard paper such as transparency labels vellum cards

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

ANALIZADOR DE REDES AR5-L  Innergie mCube Pro  ACCORD Database  Samsung SL-M2620 Инструкция по использованию      nomenclatore - newmedicaltrend  取扱説明書 - GENTOS  @ESPRESSO - PRELIMINARE - 1T12:A5.qxd  Scarica  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file